Implementations in academic year 2020 - 2021

•   Academic Communication 3B00DW79-3001 01.08.2020-15.12.2020  3 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course deals with academic communication in sufficient depth and detail to enable students to present research work and write reports in academic style, as may be required for other courses in this degree programm. Most of the topics covered will also be relevant to writing a final thesis, so this course can be considered as a basic introduction to that process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Demonstrate familiarity with the principles of academic communication.
  Access and critically evaluate relevant source materials.
  Get familiar with the concept of plagiarism and know how to avoid it in their own work.
  Incorporate in-text references to source materials and compile a list of sources, following TAMK requirements.
  Produce academic texts which meet set criteria: clear, accurate and formal English, coherent structure.
  Present constructive and well-justified verbal arguments and feedback in formal, face-to-face academic settings, such as seminars and public lectures.
  Utilize resources and learning strategies to develop their own communication skills independently.

  Course contents

  What are the key features of academic communication and how does it differ from organizational communication?
  What are the roles of verbal and written communication in the academic context?
  What norms and standards must academic writing meet?
  What stages must a a writer process to produce an academic text?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student communicates in comprehensible English overall and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text. References to source materials are included where appropriate.

  Good

  The student's English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets the norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled.

  Excellent

  The student's written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style, reports meet the norms for different types of text. He/she shows ability to access and select appropriate information. References to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways, source materials are expertly paraphrased. Oral expression is fluent and professional.

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 15.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Academic Communication 3B00DW79-3002 01.08.2020-15.12.2020  3 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course deals with academic communication in sufficient depth and detail to enable students to present research work and write reports in academic style, as may be required for other courses in this degree programm. Most of the topics covered will also be relevant to writing a final thesis, so this course can be considered as a basic introduction to that process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Demonstrate familiarity with the principles of academic communication.
  Access and critically evaluate relevant source materials.
  Get familiar with the concept of plagiarism and know how to avoid it in their own work.
  Incorporate in-text references to source materials and compile a list of sources, following TAMK requirements.
  Produce academic texts which meet set criteria: clear, accurate and formal English, coherent structure.
  Present constructive and well-justified verbal arguments and feedback in formal, face-to-face academic settings, such as seminars and public lectures.
  Utilize resources and learning strategies to develop their own communication skills independently.

  Course contents

  What are the key features of academic communication and how does it differ from organizational communication?
  What are the roles of verbal and written communication in the academic context?
  What norms and standards must academic writing meet?
  What stages must a a writer process to produce an academic text?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student communicates in comprehensible English overall and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text. References to source materials are included where appropriate.

  Good

  The student's English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets the norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled.

  Excellent

  The student's written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style, reports meet the norms for different types of text. He/she shows ability to access and select appropriate information. References to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways, source materials are expertly paraphrased. Oral expression is fluent and professional.

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 15.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Academic Communication 3B00DW79-3006 02.02.2021-30.06.2021  3 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course deals with academic communication in sufficient depth and detail to enable students to present research work and write reports in academic style, as may be required for other courses in this degree programm. Most of the topics covered will also be relevant to writing a final thesis, so this course can be considered as a basic introduction to that process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Demonstrate familiarity with the principles of academic communication.
  Access and critically evaluate relevant source materials.
  Get familiar with the concept of plagiarism and know how to avoid it in their own work.
  Incorporate in-text references to source materials and compile a list of sources, following TAMK requirements.
  Produce academic texts which meet set criteria: clear, accurate and formal English, coherent structure.
  Present constructive and well-justified verbal arguments and feedback in formal, face-to-face academic settings, such as seminars and public lectures.
  Utilize resources and learning strategies to develop their own communication skills independently.

  Course contents

  What are the key features of academic communication and how does it differ from organizational communication?
  What are the roles of verbal and written communication in the academic context?
  What norms and standards must academic writing meet?
  What stages must a a writer process to produce an academic text?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student communicates in comprehensible English overall and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text. References to source materials are included where appropriate.

  Good

  The student's English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets the norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled.

  Excellent

  The student's written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style, reports meet the norms for different types of text. He/she shows ability to access and select appropriate information. References to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways, source materials are expertly paraphrased. Oral expression is fluent and professional.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Recommended or required reading

  Some materials and exercises will be provided during the course. Authentic online materials will be used as well.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lectures, online activities including video conferences. Collaborative learning coupled with online exercises, Reading and analyzing academic text, producing academic text.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  This course emphasizes on academic writing and the evaluation is based on 0-5 grading scale where 0 is fail and 5 is excellent. Active participation in class and online collaborative platforms are required. To get a minimum pass, student need to get at least minimum of 6 points accumulated through attending sessions and doing exercises, and, at least one submitted essay.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  02.02.2021 - 30.06.2021

  Registration

  01.01.2021 - 27.01.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Accreditation

  Exam schedule

  An academic essay and a research report replace exam.

  International connections

  Collaboration with Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences.

  Students use of time and load

  Student will devote his/her time in research and writing/ producing academic text.

  Content periodicity

  Literature based essay (Individual task) and Research based report (Collaborative task, Team work, optional)

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student has not attended the minimum number of lessons and has not provided any evidence of ilness to justify their absence.

  Satisfactory

  Satisfactory (1-2):
  The student has attendedn the minimum lessons of 80%. He/she communicates in comprehensible English on the whole and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text; references to source materials are included where appropriate. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are minimally fulfilled.

  Good

  Good: (3-4)
  The student has attained at least, 80% of attendance. His/her English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled. The student has used multiple source of academic writers in his/her work accurately in accordance with TAMK's report guide.

  Excellent

  Excellent (5)
  Students’ written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style; reports meet norms for different types of text; students show ability to access and select appropriate information; references to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways; source materials are expertly paraphrased. The student has used multiple source of academic writers in his/her work accurately in accordance with TAMK's report guide.Oral expression is fluent and professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are consistently fulfilled.

•   Advanced Accounting and Finance 3B00DW53-3001 11.01.2021-23.04.2021  6 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course completes the students’ accounting and finance module studies and consists of two parts.
  
  Firstly, the students study and learn about the working capital management concept and theory. Studying this part is linked to understanding of typical corporate life from start-up to growth company – and further on to the mature business phase.
  
  Secondly, a selection of advanced industry-specific and other themes and topics are assigned to the students, enabling them to link their accounting and finance studies to their own favorite industries or some most motivating current themes and topics of today’s business life.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  
  Apply their finance and managerial accounting skills to industry-specific business cases.
  See and analyze the big picture of working capital case-specifically, react immediately when necessary - and initiate business development actions based on the analysis.
  Control the working capital professionally, using performance measures such as current ratio, turnover of inventory, turnovers of accounts receivable and payable, as well as gearing %.
  Calculate the profitability of working capital investment using the net present value (NPV) method.
  Identify the need for using advanced methods such as just-in-time (JIT) management, lean accounting and environmental accounting when necessary.
  Create basic-level cash plans and cash flow forecasts.

  Course contents

  What is the working capital concept, and what is the strategic importance of it?
  What is the working capital cycle, and how can working capital be managed successfully?
  How can cash and inventory processes and balances be improved?
  How can the management of trade receivables and payables as well as cash flows be enhanced?
  What is gearing %, and how can it be used in practice?
  Which industries, current trends and phenomena are potential ones for advanced accounting and finance efforts and applications?
  When is it time for environmental or lean accounting, or e.g. for applying the just-in-time (JIT) method?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of cash management and working capital management, as well as some cash flow and digital finance related industry or case specific applications. He/she can take responsibility for his individual duties in routine cash and working capital management as well as related measurement and reporting activities, and is able to make some contribution in a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of applying and explaining the concepts and methods of cash and working capital management as well as performing cash flow and digital finance in related industry or case specific analyses in controllable situations. He/she works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. He/she can solve cash and working capital management problems as well as work on cash flow and digital finance related measurement, reporting and development activities. His/her courses of action are well justified.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse complex situations and produce alternative solution proposals to various cash and working capital management problems. He/she can produce cash flow and digital finance related industry or case specific analyses. He/she can apply his extensive knowledge and skills of the subject matter excellently in problem solving, experiments, and when working on cash flow and digital finance related analysis, reporting and business development activities. His/her courses of action are very well justified, and he can work individually, making remarkable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly with excellent commitment.

  Approved/Failed

  The student does not perform in the course exam acceptably, or he/she does not complete the compulsory exercises, assignments and/or other compulsory items on the course agendas acceptably.

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  11.01.2021 - 23.04.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 19.01.2021

  Credits

  6 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Bachelor’s Thesis, Final Report 3B00CX35-3003 01.01.2021-31.12.2021  10 cr  (18IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The BBA final thesis is typically a planning or development task done for a company or an organization. The thesis can also be a research. It is written following the practices of scientific reporting and with emphasis on practical solutions for company problems.
  Writing the final thesis will take from four to six months, depending on the topic and level of difficulty. The main idea of the thesis is to combine theoretical knowledge with practical skills to produce topical solutions for company needs.
  
  The students find the topic of the thesis themselves, often during their practical training. The final thesis can be done as individual or pair work, and it can be multidisciplinary in nature. The topic of the thesis must be related to the student’s field of study, and preferably be linked to the student’s chosen specialization module in the International Business programme.
  
  After and during the thesis process, the students will be able to:
  
  
  Apply the gained theoretical and practical know-how to overcome the challenges of a company or an organization.
  Develop professional skills related to their own field of study.
  Demonstrate the competence to work independently, responsibly and systematically.
  Adopt a critical, research-based and developing attitude in thesis writing process.
  Know how to use appropriate information retrieval methods and understand the importance of criticism of sources.
  Know how to choose and apply appropriate research methods.
  Demonstrate the ability to develop their own professional field.
  Adopt ethical principles of a research process.
  Produce a thesis report according to practices of scientific reporting.

  Course contents

  How to plan, execute and report a Bachelor’s Thesis?
  What is the aim of a Bachelor’s Thesis project?
  How to show professional skills and competences in a Bachelor’s Thesis?

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  01.01.2021 - 13.12.2021

  Credits

  10 cr

  Group(s)

  18IB

  Teacher(s)

  Markus Jähi, Elena Grigorova, Petteri Vilén, Sari Matala, Ella Hakala, Annikka Lepola, Tuula Andersson, Pasi Kuusijärvi, Sven Rassl, Tuomo Soini, Matti Karlsson, Shaidul Kazi, International Business, IB Virtuaalihenkilö

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Basics of Financial Accounting 3B00DW03-3004 01.01.2021-07.03.2021  2 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course introduces the basics of financial accounting. Students will learn bookkeeping in virtual companies.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Describe the basic concepts and principles of accounting
  • Record basic business transactions in accounting

  Course contents

  • What are the purposes of accounting and who are the users of accounting information?
  • What is the conceptual framework in accounting?
  • What are the phases of an accounting period?
  • What does double-entry accounting mean?
  • What is accounting equation?
  • How are business transactions recorded in accounting?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise and define fundamentals of financial accounting. He/she knows the stages of accounting period and is able to record basic financial transactions using bookkeeping software. The student takes responsibility for his/her own work in individual assignments.

  Good

  The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting well. The student can use bookkeeping software at a basic level. The student takes responsibility for his/her own work and recognises and follows the important courses of action in the field.

  Excellent

  The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting in an excellent manner. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student can use bookkeeping software well at a basic level. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner and develops his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  The list of recommended litterature is available in course Moodle (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - lectures
  - assignments
  - teamwork

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2021 - 07.03.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 14.01.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  --- (not translated)

  Training and labour cooperation

  --- (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  Exam week 8/2020 (preliminary)

  Students use of time and load

  2 ECTS, approximately 54 h

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student has failed in achieving the objectives of the course.

  Satisfactory

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands fundamentals of financial accounting and knows the basic functions of Fennoa book-keeping program.

  Good

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting well. Student can use Fennoa book-keeping program at a basic level.

  Excellent

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting in an excellent manner. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. Student can use Fennoa book-keeping program well at a basic level.

•   Basics of Financial Accounting 3B00DW03-3005 01.01.2021-07.03.2021  2 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course introduces the basics of financial accounting. Students will learn bookkeeping in virtual companies.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Describe the basic concepts and principles of accounting
  • Record basic business transactions in accounting

  Course contents

  • What are the purposes of accounting and who are the users of accounting information?
  • What is the conceptual framework in accounting?
  • What are the phases of an accounting period?
  • What does double-entry accounting mean?
  • What is accounting equation?
  • How are business transactions recorded in accounting?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise and define fundamentals of financial accounting. He/she knows the stages of accounting period and is able to record basic financial transactions using bookkeeping software. The student takes responsibility for his/her own work in individual assignments.

  Good

  The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting well. The student can use bookkeeping software at a basic level. The student takes responsibility for his/her own work and recognises and follows the important courses of action in the field.

  Excellent

  The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting in an excellent manner. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student can use bookkeeping software well at a basic level. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner and develops his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  The list of recommended litterature is available in course Moodle (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - lectures
  - assignments
  - teamwork

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2021 - 07.03.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 14.01.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  --- (not translated)

  Training and labour cooperation

  --- (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  Exam week 8/2020 (preliminary)

  Students use of time and load

  2 ECTS, approximately 54 h

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student has failed in achieving the objectives of the course.

  Satisfactory

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands fundamentals of financial accounting and knows the basic functions of Fennoa book-keeping program.

  Good

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting well. Student can use Fennoa book-keeping program at a basic level.

  Excellent

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting in an excellent manner. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. Student can use Fennoa book-keeping program well at a basic level.

•   Basics of International Business 3B00DW11-3006 15.03.2021-31.05.2021  3 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course describes the first steps of the internationalization process of small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs). Students learn to make a basic market analysis of a new target market for a company. Students analyze international marketing environment (macro and micro) of the target country and help the company with their internationalization plan.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Search for market information of a new target market
  • Describe the contents of an international market analysis.
  • Analyze international marketing environment of a target country
  • Apply the knowledge of the market analysis to company’s internationalization plan.
  • Work effectively in a multicultural team.

  Course contents

  • How to find market information of a new target market?
  • What is international market analysis?
  • What are the special features of international marketing environment?
  • What knowledge is needed when entering into a new target country?
  • How to work effectively in a multicultural team?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is familiar with basic concepts of international business. He/she is aware of common export modes. The student knows how to identify factors that indicate potential export markets in order to define market entry modes. The student can identify selected sources of market information and apply that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working in a multicultural team.

  Good

  The student has comprehensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can analyse and select suitable export modes. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating promising export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify a variety of sources of market information and relate that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively in a multicultural team.

  Excellent

  The student has extensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can identify, analyse and select the accurate export modes in a variety of situations. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating strong export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify an extensive variety of sources of market information. He/she can utilize and apply that market information in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively and productively in a multicultural team.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  The course material and literature will be informed later.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online contact lessons, individual and team learning, international team project.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  15.03.2021 - 31.05.2021

  Registration

  17.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Annikka Lepola

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Training and labour cooperation

  An internationalization project will be conducted for a business company according to their project case briefing.

  Students use of time and load

  The course is 3 credits which is 80 hours of student's work: 1/3 of the time will be used in teacher led workshops and 2/3 hours in independent studying and teamwork.

  Content periodicity

  The course plan will be introduced in the first contact class.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is familiar with basic concepts of international business. He/she is aware of common export modes. The student knows how to identify factors that indicate potential export markets in order to define market entry modes. The student can identify selected sources of market information and apply that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working in a multicultural team.

  Good

  The student has comprehensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can analyse and select suitable export modes. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating promising export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify a variety of sources of market information and relate that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively in a multicultural team.

  Excellent

  The student has extensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can identify, analyse and select the accurate export modes in a variety of situations. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating strong export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify an extensive variety of sources of market information. He/she can utilize and apply that market information in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively and productively in a multicultural team.

•   Basics of International Business 3B00DW11-3007 15.03.2021-31.05.2021  3 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course describes the first steps of the internationalization process of small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs). Students learn to make a basic market analysis of a new target market for a company. Students analyze international marketing environment (macro and micro) of the target country and help the company with their internationalization plan.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Search for market information of a new target market
  • Describe the contents of an international market analysis.
  • Analyze international marketing environment of a target country
  • Apply the knowledge of the market analysis to company’s internationalization plan.
  • Work effectively in a multicultural team.

  Course contents

  • How to find market information of a new target market?
  • What is international market analysis?
  • What are the special features of international marketing environment?
  • What knowledge is needed when entering into a new target country?
  • How to work effectively in a multicultural team?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is familiar with basic concepts of international business. He/she is aware of common export modes. The student knows how to identify factors that indicate potential export markets in order to define market entry modes. The student can identify selected sources of market information and apply that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working in a multicultural team.

  Good

  The student has comprehensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can analyse and select suitable export modes. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating promising export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify a variety of sources of market information and relate that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively in a multicultural team.

  Excellent

  The student has extensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can identify, analyse and select the accurate export modes in a variety of situations. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating strong export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify an extensive variety of sources of market information. He/she can utilize and apply that market information in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively and productively in a multicultural team.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  The course material and literature will be informed later.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online contact lessons, individual and team learning, international team project.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  15.03.2021 - 31.05.2021

  Registration

  17.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Annikka Lepola

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Training and labour cooperation

  An internationalization project will be conducted for a business company according to their project case briefing.

  Students use of time and load

  The course is 3 credits which is 80 hours of student's work: 1/3 of the time will be used in teacher led workshops and 2/3 hours in independent studying and teamwork.

  Content periodicity

  The course plan will be introduced in the first contact class.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is familiar with basic concepts of international business. He/she is aware of common export modes. The student knows how to identify factors that indicate potential export markets in order to define market entry modes. The student can identify selected sources of market information and apply that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working in a multicultural team.

  Good

  The student has comprehensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can analyse and select suitable export modes. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating promising export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify a variety of sources of market information and relate that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively in a multicultural team.

  Excellent

  The student has extensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can identify, analyse and select the accurate export modes in a variety of situations. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating strong export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify an extensive variety of sources of market information. He/she can utilize and apply that market information in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively and productively in a multicultural team.

•   Business Case Consulting Training 3B00DO51-3003 08.09.2020-08.12.2020  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Completing this training module teaches students to apply theories from various business disciplines to real company problems. The students will be provided with a strong foundation of analytical tools and techniques, problem-solving methodologies and effective presentation and communication techniques. The students will then be able to apply and refine their use of these techniques through hands-on learning with several business cases.
  After successful completion of the module, the students will be able to
  - Develop and evaluate alternative feasible solutions for different international and national business cases
  - Apply theories and analytical tools from different business disciplines to real-world situations
  - Make clear and justifiable recommendations to real-life business problems
  - Present decisions to public in a professional manner
  - Demonstrate various leadership skills related to teamwork, innovation process management, work organization and methods, and initiative

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Open to 2nd and 3rd year students of Business Administration (incl. Proacademy) and International Business. There will be selection of students to the study module if needed.

  Course contents

  How to identify relevant information for different business decisions?
  What are the methods in solving business cases with a structured approach?
  How to give clear, convincing and engaging business presentations?

  Further information

  Contact classes are mandatory and held once a week during periods 1 and 2. Students are required to attend a minimum of 80% of the total of the contact class sessions to be eligible for a final grade. Students are also required to attend own weekly group sessions on free-selected time.

  ---

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Teaching methods focus strongly on practical, hand-on learning. This will be implemented by providing business cases that students solve by applying knowledge from various areas of study and effectively present the solutions. There will also be lectures focusing on specific areas that needs to be considered in analyzing and solving business cases.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Contact classes are mandatory and held once a week during periods 1 and 2. Students are required to attend a minimum of 80% of the total of the contact class sessions to be eligible for a final grade. Students are also required to attend own weekly group sessions on free-selected time.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.09.2020 - 08.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  18IB

  Teacher(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu, Mari Rytisalo

  Further information for students

  Criteria for enrolling to the study module:
  - 2nd or 3rd full-time student
  - Studying Business Administration/International Business/Industrial Engineering/Management
  Because of the nature of the study module, cancelling participation after the study module has started is not possible.
  If selected to a team representing home institution in a business case competition, please notice that some competitions have a rule of an age limit.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business, Degree Programme in Business Administration

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Training and labour cooperation

  The study module will be implemented in cooperation with companies that provide real business cases for student teams to solve.

  International connections

  The best student team will have an opportunity to represent TAMK in an international case competition given that they are willing to spend time on additional case coaching if necessary.

  Students use of time and load

  Classroom sessions:42 hours
  Class preparation (case analyses): 68 hours
  Other assignments: 25 hours

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student has not participated to required amount of contact classes (80 %) and/or the contribution to team work has been minimal.

  Satisfactory

  Student has been present required amount of contact classes (80 %) but the contribution to the different processes of team work and presenting case solutions has been not more than satisfactory level.

  Good

  In solving the cases, student is able to participate in decision-making and gives an average input in the process of defining the problem(s), gathering and analyzing relevant information, and finally developing and evaluating alternative courses of action. Based on this analytical process student is able to participate in creating a recommendation on what s/he thinks is the best course of action as well as providing detailed implementation and risk mitigation plans. Presentation skills are average level in professionalism and assertiveness. The operation in a team is varying in perspectives of being responsible, considerate, motivated and task-oriented.

  Excellent

  In solving the cases, student is able to act as a decision-maker and go through the stages of defining the problem(s), gathering and analyzing relevant information, and finally developing and evaluating alternative courses of action. Based on this analytical process student is able to create a recommendation on what s/he thinks is the best course of action as well as providing detailed implementation and risk mitigation plans. Presentation skills are convincing and professional. The operation in a team is responsible, considerate, motivated and task-oriented.

•   Business Game 3B00DW27-3001 07.09.2020-09.10.2020  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  In this course students operate as a management team of a global company. Management teams come up with a company strategy and make decisions to maximize the profits and company value. Company operations are carried out in a business simulation game in a competitive team environment.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Utilize the role of strategy as a key success factor.
  Explain the interdependence between the different company operations.
  Demonstrate knowledge and skills in financial review, company analysis, and strategy formulation.
  Utilize tools for entrepreneurial thinking.

  Course contents

  What is a role of a strategy to manage a company?
  How does product portfolio, pricing, marketing and product features impact the demand of the product?
  How to analyze company's financial performance and how to impact it?
  How to work as a successful team utilizing each team players' strengths?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student participates in the team work but is able to read the market and company information and utilise that data in decision making if assisted. The student struggles to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome.

  Good

  The student actively participates in the teamwork and completes all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyse the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student participates actively in decision making enabling the improvement of the company status. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company's strategy and value, and answer questions related to these topics.

  Excellent

  The student actively participates in the teamwork and demonstrates a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyses the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company's strategy and the company's value. The student is able to answer various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Material available in Tabula (lectures and business simulation guide)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Learning simulation, lectures, quiz, coaching (using distance learning tools)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  ** Quality of written tasks and ranking and performance in the game (grade 0-5)
  * Final presentation (0-5)
  * Quiz and company audit (pass/fail)
  * Attendance and activity in team work impact the grade

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.09.2020 - 09.10.2020

  Registration

  10.06.2020 - 31.08.2020

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Teacher(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács, Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  ---

  Exam schedule

  The game has several game rounds. The schedule of the rounds will be presented in the first lecture. The course will end with the final presentation.

  Students use of time and load

  4 credit points (27 hours per credit point)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is participating to the team work but has great trouble to read the market and company information and utilize that data in decision making. The student is struggling to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome. The student has done all the required course tasks but the quality of those tasks is inadequate.

  Good

  The student actively participates to the teamwork and returns all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyze the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student shows progress in decision making so that the company's financial status will improve. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company strategy and value and answer to the questions relating those topics.

  Excellent

  The student is actively participating to the teamwork and is demonstrating a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyzes the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company strategy and the company value. The student is able to answer to various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

•   Business Game 3B00DW27-3002 26.10.2020-07.12.2020  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  In this course students operate as a management team of a global company. Management teams come up with a company strategy and make decisions to maximize the profits and company value. Company operations are carried out in a business simulation game in a competitive team environment.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Utilize the role of strategy as a key success factor.
  Explain the interdependence between the different company operations.
  Demonstrate knowledge and skills in financial review, company analysis, and strategy formulation.
  Utilize tools for entrepreneurial thinking.

  Course contents

  What is a role of a strategy to manage a company?
  How does product portfolio, pricing, marketing and product features impact the demand of the product?
  How to analyze company's financial performance and how to impact it?
  How to work as a successful team utilizing each team players' strengths?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student participates in the team work but is able to read the market and company information and utilise that data in decision making if assisted. The student struggles to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome.

  Good

  The student actively participates in the teamwork and completes all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyse the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student participates actively in decision making enabling the improvement of the company status. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company's strategy and value, and answer questions related to these topics.

  Excellent

  The student actively participates in the teamwork and demonstrates a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyses the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company's strategy and the company's value. The student is able to answer various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Material available in Moodle (lectures and business simulation guide)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Learning simulation, lectures, quiz, coaching (using distance learning tools)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  ** Quality of written tasks and ranking and performance in the game (grade 0-5)
  * Final presentation (0-5)
  * Quiz and company audit (pass/fail)
  * Attendance and activity in team work impact the grade

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  26.10.2020 - 07.12.2020

  Registration

  16.09.2020 - 22.10.2020

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Teacher(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács, Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  ---

  Exam schedule

  The game has several game rounds. The schedule of the rounds will be presented in the first lecture. The course will end with the final presentation.

  Students use of time and load

  4 credit points (27 hours per credit point)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is participating to the team work but has great trouble to read the market and company information and utilize that data in decision making. The student is struggling to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome. The student has done all the required course tasks but the quality of those tasks is inadequate.

  Good

  The student actively participates to the teamwork and returns all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyze the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student shows progress in decision making so that the company's financial status will improve. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company strategy and value and answer to the questions relating those topics.

  Excellent

  The student is actively participating to the teamwork and is demonstrating a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyzes the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company strategy and the company value. The student is able to answer to various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

•   Business Game 3B00DW27-3004 12.01.2021-26.02.2021  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  In this course students operate as a management team of a global company. Management teams come up with a company strategy and make decisions to maximize the profits and company value. Company operations are carried out in a business simulation game in a competitive team environment.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Utilize the role of strategy as a key success factor.
  Explain the interdependence between the different company operations.
  Demonstrate knowledge and skills in financial review, company analysis, and strategy formulation.
  Utilize tools for entrepreneurial thinking.

  Course contents

  What is a role of a strategy to manage a company?
  How does product portfolio, pricing, marketing and product features impact the demand of the product?
  How to analyze company's financial performance and how to impact it?
  How to work as a successful team utilizing each team players' strengths?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student participates in the team work but is able to read the market and company information and utilise that data in decision making if assisted. The student struggles to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome.

  Good

  The student actively participates in the teamwork and completes all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyse the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student participates actively in decision making enabling the improvement of the company status. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company's strategy and value, and answer questions related to these topics.

  Excellent

  The student actively participates in the teamwork and demonstrates a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyses the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company's strategy and the company's value. The student is able to answer various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Material available in Moodle (lectures and business simulation guide)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Learning simulation, lectures, quiz, coaching (using distance learning tools)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  ** Quality of written tasks and ranking and performance in the game (grade 0-5)
  * Final presentation (0-5)
  * Quiz and company audit (pass/fail)
  * Attendance and activity in team work impact the grade

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  12.01.2021 - 26.02.2021

  Registration

  11.11.2020 - 07.01.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Teacher(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács, Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  ---

  Exam schedule

  The game has several game rounds. The schedule of the rounds will be presented in the first lecture. The course will end with the final presentation.

  Students use of time and load

  4 credit points (27 hours per credit point)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is participating to the team work but has great trouble to read the market and company information and utilize that data in decision making. The student is struggling to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome. The student has done all the required course tasks but the quality of those tasks is inadequate.

  Good

  The student actively participates to the teamwork and returns all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyze the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student shows progress in decision making so that the company's financial status will improve. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company strategy and value and answer to the questions relating those topics.

  Excellent

  The student is actively participating to the teamwork and is demonstrating a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyzes the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company strategy and the company value. The student is able to answer to various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

•   Business Planning 1 3B00DV79-3004 01.08.2020-18.10.2020  2 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This business planning course provides both basic theory and hands-on guidance to business planning. Primary objective is for students to learn the basics of business planning (1st period) and be able to create such a plan (2nd period) for a virtual company.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand the structure of a typical business plan
  • Describe the purpose of each element of the business plan
  • Apply basic business planning principles for the virtual company

  Course contents

  • What is the importance of a business plan?
  • What are the business idea, mission and vision of a business?
  • How to define value proposition for different customer segments?
  • How to position your own business in the market and gain competitive advantage?
  • How to frame an opportunity and draft a business model?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the core elements needed for starting a company, the stages of a start-up process and the core concepts of business planning. He/she is able to draft a viable business idea and give and receive feedback related to business planning. The student can collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks and take responsibility of own studies related to business planning.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the core elements needed for starting a company, the stages of a start-up process and the core concepts of business planning. The student is able to draft a business idea by applying the entrepreneurial approach, and give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning. He/she takes responsibility of his/her own studies and group work related to business planning

  Excellent

  The student is able to analyse systematically what is needed for business planning of a start-up company and use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning. He/she is able to justify the credibility of the business idea. The student commits himself/herself to own studies and group work related to business planning.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Course will start as on-line remote learning. Any instructions for on-site learning at TAMK campus will be informed when topical.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Business Planning 1 3B00DV79-3005 01.08.2020-18.10.2020  2 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This business planning course provides both basic theory and hands-on guidance to business planning. Primary objective is for students to learn the basics of business planning (1st period) and be able to create such a plan (2nd period) for a virtual company.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand the structure of a typical business plan
  • Describe the purpose of each element of the business plan
  • Apply basic business planning principles for the virtual company

  Course contents

  • What is the importance of a business plan?
  • What are the business idea, mission and vision of a business?
  • How to define value proposition for different customer segments?
  • How to position your own business in the market and gain competitive advantage?
  • How to frame an opportunity and draft a business model?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the core elements needed for starting a company, the stages of a start-up process and the core concepts of business planning. He/she is able to draft a viable business idea and give and receive feedback related to business planning. The student can collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks and take responsibility of own studies related to business planning.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the core elements needed for starting a company, the stages of a start-up process and the core concepts of business planning. The student is able to draft a business idea by applying the entrepreneurial approach, and give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning. He/she takes responsibility of his/her own studies and group work related to business planning

  Excellent

  The student is able to analyse systematically what is needed for business planning of a start-up company and use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning. He/she is able to justify the credibility of the business idea. The student commits himself/herself to own studies and group work related to business planning.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Course will start as on-line remote learning. Any instructions for on-site learning at TAMK campus will be informed when topical.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Business Planning 2 3B00DV95-3003 19.10.2020-14.12.2020  2 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This business planning course provides both basic theory and hands-on guidance to business planning. Primary objective is for students to learn the basics of business planning (1st period) and be able to create such a plan (2nd period) for a virtual company.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand the structure of a typical business plan
  • Describe the purpose of each element of the business plan
  • Apply basic business planning principles

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Business Planning 1

  Course contents

  • What are the features of a good business plan?
  • How to create business plan for the virtual company?
  • How to determine prices for the products and services?
  • Which actions should be taken when implementing a business plan?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the core elements of a business plan and a business model. The student is able to create a viable business plan including the business model. He/she is able to give and receive feedback related to business planning and collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studies related to business planning.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the core elements of a business plan and the core elements of a business model. He/she can create a coherent and credible business plan including the business model. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning and take responsibility of his/her studies and group work related to business planning.

  Excellent

  The student can use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning and business models. The student is able to justify the decisions in the business plan with proper analysis and commit himself/herself to individual studies and group work related to business planning.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  19.10.2020 - 14.12.2020

  Registration

  16.09.2020 - 15.10.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Business Planning 2 3B00DV95-3004 19.10.2020-14.12.2020  2 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This business planning course provides both basic theory and hands-on guidance to business planning. Primary objective is for students to learn the basics of business planning (1st period) and be able to create such a plan (2nd period) for a virtual company.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand the structure of a typical business plan
  • Describe the purpose of each element of the business plan
  • Apply basic business planning principles

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Business Planning 1

  Course contents

  • What are the features of a good business plan?
  • How to create business plan for the virtual company?
  • How to determine prices for the products and services?
  • Which actions should be taken when implementing a business plan?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the core elements of a business plan and a business model. The student is able to create a viable business plan including the business model. He/she is able to give and receive feedback related to business planning and collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studies related to business planning.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the core elements of a business plan and the core elements of a business model. He/she can create a coherent and credible business plan including the business model. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning and take responsibility of his/her studies and group work related to business planning.

  Excellent

  The student can use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning and business models. The student is able to justify the decisions in the business plan with proper analysis and commit himself/herself to individual studies and group work related to business planning.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  19.10.2020 - 14.12.2020

  Registration

  16.09.2020 - 15.10.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Conflict Management and Communication 3B00CX26-3007 07.09.2020-30.11.2020  5 cr  (20KVHN2, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course aims at improving the students’ understanding of conflict management, resolution and communication, in a company or organization environment. Furthermore, crisis communication is among the essential topics of the course.
  
  There is an increasing need for settling disputes between individuals and groups of individuals, as a result of internationalization of business and a variety of financial restraints that cause tension among management and personnel of a company (internal conflict management). External conflict management deals with measures a company must take in order to control its brand, image, customer and stakeholder relations, in circumstances of uncertainties and even open conflicts.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  The course will include demonstrations, examples, creation of conflict and crisis resolution strategy/plans, communication rehearsals and analyses. It is suitable for students who are interested in developing one’s conflict and crisis management abilities, especially in terms of communication.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Kai Hintsanen

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online course.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.09.2020 - 30.11.2020

  Registration

  01.05.2020 - 07.09.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20KVHN2

  18IB

  17IB

  VAPAA

  Seats

  0 - 25

  Teacher(s)

  Kai Hintsanen, Sean Morga

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Conflict Management and Communication 3B00DW95-3002 17.03.2021-15.05.2021  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course aims at improving the students’ understanding of conflict management, resolution and communication, in a company or organization environment. Furthermore, crisis communication is among the essential topics of the course.
  
  There is an increasing need for settling disputes between individuals and groups of individuals, as a result of internationalization of business and a variety of financial restraints that cause tension among management and personnel of a company (internal conflict management). External conflict management deals with measures a company must take in order to control its brand, image, customer and stakeholder relations, in circumstances of uncertainties and even open conflicts.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  The course will include demonstrations, examples, creation of conflict and crisis resolution strategy/plans, communication rehearsals and analyses. It is suitable for students who are interested in developing one’s conflict and crisis management abilities, especially in terms of communication.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name basic concepts of conflict management, change and crisis communication and the ways of influencing (lobbying). He/she is able to recognise situations where these communication skills are needed. He/she knows the significance of these in terms of advocating welfare of the organisation he/she represents. He/she is able to apply the tools and best practices in simple cases.

  Good

  The student can explain why conflict management, change and crisis communication, and influencing are important for any organisation. He/she has, to some extent, the ability to apply theories on them in conjunction with real life cases. He/she is able to participate in producing credible and implementable plans for situations where these are needed. The student is able to act in a sustainable way ethically in delicate conflict and crisis situations.

  Excellent

  The student is able to take initiative in complex conflict and crisis situations, as well as in lobbying for his/her organisation. He/she is able to co-lead a group responsibly for prompt action that is often required, in terms of preventing the organisation from finding itself in a further predicament. He/she can be entrusted with the role of a spokesperson and mediator even in demanding conflict and crisis cases. He/she understands the significance of trustworthy appearance while addressing demanding cases on behalf of his/her organisation.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials provided by the teachers in Moodle.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lectures, distance learning, exercises, demonstrations, cases, videos.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Assessment will be performed on a scale 0-5.
  The assignments will be graded and the average will be the final grade.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  17.03.2021 - 15.05.2021

  Registration

  11.11.2020 - 17.02.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 30

  Teacher(s)

  Kai Hintsanen, Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  -

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None.

  Training and labour cooperation

  Work place cases.

  Exam schedule

  None.

  International connections

  International examples.

  Students use of time and load

  Online teaching 15 hours
  Exercises 30 hours
  Reading the materials 40 hours
  Preparing a video + handout 15 hours

  Content periodicity

  100% online course, doable in student's own pace.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student fails to submit the given assignments as required.

  Satisfactory

  The student can name basic concepts of conflict management, change and crisis communication and the ways of influencing (lobbying). He/she is able to recognise situations where these communication skills are needed. He/she knows the significance of these in terms of advocating the welfare of the organisation he/she represents. He/she is able to apply the tools and best practices in simple cases.

  Good

  The student can explain why conflict management, change and crisis communication, and influencing are important for any organisation. He/she has, to some extent, the ability to apply theories on them in conjunction with real-life cases. He/she is able to participate in producing credible and implementable plans for situations where these are needed. The student is able to act in a sustainable way ethically in delicate conflict and crisis situations.

  Excellent

  The student is able to take initiative in complex conflict and crisis situations, as well as in lobbying for his/her organisation. He/she is able to co-lead the group responsibly for prompt action that is often required, in terms of preserving the organisation from winding up in a further predicament. He/she can be entrusted the role of a spokesperson and mediator even in demanding conflict and crisis cases. He/she understands the significance of trustworthy appearance while addressing demanding cases on behalf of his/her organisation.

•   Consultation Projects (PILOT VERSION) 3B00EX35-3001 19.10.2020-15.12.2020  10 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Learning outcomes of the course unit
  This course will cover how innovation supports entrepreneurs through the creation of new businesses opportunities, capturing of new markets and improved organizational effectiveness. The course will focus on the role of innovation in the entrepreneurial process and how innovation can be transformed into ongoing new ventures. Innovation and entrepreneurship theories and concepts will be applied in real life business cases. The course approach is practical: teams of 3-4 students pick up a project from a commissioning company/organization or start project of their own.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  • Understand the role of innovation in the context of entrepreneurship
  • Carry out consultation projects with a focus on entrepreneurship
  • Accomplish the project, analyze and report the results to customer
  • Plan and implement a project independently and as member of a team.

  Course contents

  • How to utilize innovation in the context of entrepreneurship
  • How to convert ideas to innovation?
  • How to commercialize innovations?
  • How to implement innovation management in start-up companies
  • How to consult entrepreneurs on innovation

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to apply the concepts and theories of innovation into practice by carrying out simple consultation projects for startups or SME:s. Under supervision and with the support of a mentor, the student is able to accomplish the project and report the results to the customer. He/she can support a consultation project as member of a team.

  Good

  The student is familiar with the concepts and theories of innovation and can utilize them in a practical small business case consultation project. He/she can independently and as a member of a group carry out consultation project for startups or SMEs. The student is able to plan, implement, and evaluate consultation projects and report the project results to the customer. He/she can contribute to the outcomes of a consultation project as a member of a team.

  Excellent

  The student has in-depth understanding of the concepts and theories of innovation and he/she can utilise these concepts in a practical small business case consultation project. He/she can independently, or in a leading role in a team, carry out consultation projects for startups and SMEs. The student is able to plan, implement, and report the project to the customer. The student is able to reflect on his/hers own as well as team work process. He/she can facilitate, contribute and enhance the outcomes of a consultation project as a leading member of a team.

  Further information

  This course will be taught in conjunction with the course “INNOVATIONS AND BUSINESS MANAGEMENT (5 credits)”

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Tuula Andersson

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  19.10.2020 - 15.12.2020

  Registration

  14.08.2020 - 19.10.2020

  Credits

  10 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Tuula Andersson, Annikka Lepola

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  10 cr

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Consultation Projects, Business Development Focus 3B00DW47-3001 18.09.2020-14.12.2020  10 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course goes through the different steps of product or service design process in practice. It gives a good understanding of how the idea is developed into a ready product or service. The course approach is practical: teams of 3-4 students pick up project from a commissioning company/organization or start project of their own.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  • Apply the concepts and theories of product and service design into practice
  • Carry out consultation projects in product and service design area
  • Accomplish the project, analyze and report the results to customer
  • Plan and implement a project independently and as member of a team.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  How to implement product design project in practice?
  How to implement service design project in practice?
  How to manage the customer interface in consultation projects?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can apply the concepts and theories of product and service design into practice. He/she can carry out simple consultation projects in product and service design area. Under supervision and with the support of a mentor, the student is able to accomplish the project and report the results to the customer. He/she can support a consultation project as member of a team.

  Good

  The student is familiar with the concepts and theories of product and service design and can utilise these concepts in a practical business case consultation project. He/she can independently and as a member of a group carry out consultation projects in the product and service design area. The student is able to plan, implement, and evaluate consultation projects and is able to report the project results to the customer. He/she can contribute to the outcomes of a consultation project as member of a team.

  Excellent

  The student has in-depth understanding of the concepts and theories of product and service design and can utilise these concepts in a practical business case consultation project. He/she can independently and as a member of a group carry out consultation projects in the product and service design area, plus he/she is able to reflect on his/her own service design work progress. The student is able to plan, implement, and evaluate consultation projects and is able to report the project results to the customer. He/she can contribute and enhance the outcomes of a consultation project as member of a team. The student actively facilitates the outcome of the consultation project.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sven Rassl

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  18.09.2020 - 14.12.2020

  Registration

  10.06.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  10 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sven Rassl, Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Corporate Finance 3B00DW49-3001 22.01.2021-23.04.2021  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course covers the basic aspects of corporate finance, the structure and functions of financial markets and elements of decision making on financial questions.
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  
  - Compare the investment opportunities of a company and define their profitability by using alternative investment decision criteria
  - Compare the alternative sources of corporate financing
  - Calculate the cost of capital
  - Define how risk relates to return
  - Describe the structure and functions of financial markets

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  - How do companies compare different investment opportunities?
  - What are the alternative sources of corporate financing?
  - How are risk and return related?
  - How is the cost of capital defined?
  - What is the structure and what are the functions of financial markets?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to explain the fundamentals of corporate finance. The student recognises and is able to determine and to a certain extent use the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance.

  Good

  The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance. He/she can use different methods to evaluate investment opportunities and understands how risk and return are related.

  Excellent

  The student masters the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance in an excellent manner. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learned understanding of the framework of financial markets.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, Global Edition, Second Edition. J.Berk, P.DeMarzo and J. Harford. Pearson International Edition.2019 or older edition
  - MyFinanceLab - online material
  - Moodle - online material

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - lectures
  - assignments (MyFinanceLab)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  - Exam (80%)
  - Homework, MyFinanceLab (20%)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  22.01.2021 - 23.04.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 10.01.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  4 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  ---

  Training and labour cooperation

  ---

  Exam schedule

  in April 2021, date still open

  International connections

  ---

  Students use of time and load

  4 ECTS, approximately 108 hours.

  Content periodicity

  Lessons usually once a week (9 weeks, distance learning using Zoom) + exam

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student has not achieved the objectives of the course.

  Satisfactory

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands fundamentals of corporate finance. Student recognizes, is able to determine and to a certain extent use the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance.

  Good

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance well.

  Excellent

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance in an excellent manner. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning.

•   Customer Intelligence, Research and Project Management 3B00CW89-3012 24.08.2020-31.12.2020  8 cr  (20KVHN2, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The aims of this course are threefold. It provides the students understanding in customer intelligence: how to collect and analyze customer information in a reliable and useful way. It also gives the students basic knowledge of the necessary research approaches for their final thesis and possible further studies. In addition the course includes a project management module to develop skills in managing a multicultural business project.
  
  After completing the course the student will be able to plan and execute a customer oriented research and development project in a scientifically reliable way.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Key questions:
  - What are the principles of valid and reliable research for business or
  academic world?
  - Which tools and methods can be used in increasing the understanding of
  customer needs to co-create customer value?
  - How to refine research data to customer intelligence?
  - How to communicate the results in an interesting way?
  - How to manage a research and development project successfully?

  Further information

  The course consists of lectures, exercises and the planning and execution of a customer related r&d project for a company or organization.
  
  Contents of the lectures:
  - Introduction: What is customer intelligence, What is academic research
  - Collecting and analyzing data in a reliable way
  - Introduction of qualitative methods
  - Introduction of quantitative methods
  - R&D process
  - Project Management principles
  
  Research and Development Project:
  Student teams find themselves a customer organization with an information and development need, execute data collection and analysis and give development suggestions based on their analysis. The outcomes will be presented in a public seminar, which is planned and managed by the students themselves.
  
  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Hanna Pihlajarinne

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  24.08.2020 - 31.12.2020

  Registration

  01.06.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  8 cr

  Group(s)

  20KVHN2

  19IB

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Customer Intelligence, Research and Project Management 3B00DW25-3001 24.08.2020-04.12.2020  8 cr  (20KVHN2, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The aims of this course are threefold. It provides the students understanding in customer intelligence: how to collect and analyze customer information in a reliable and useful way. It also gives the students basic knowledge of the necessary research approaches for their final thesis and possible further studies. In addition the course includes a project management module to develop skills in managing a multicultural business project.
  
  After completing the course the student will be able to plan and execute a customer oriented research and development project in a scientifically reliable way.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Key questions:
  - What are the principles of valid and reliable research for business or
  academic world?
  - Which tools and methods can be used in increasing the understanding of
  customer needs to co-create customer value?
  - How to refine research data to customer intelligence?
  - How to communicate the results in an interesting way?
  - How to manage a research and development project successfully?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student has rudimentary knowledge of quantitative and qualitative research methods, including data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. He/she is capable of collecting and analysing basic customer data. The student has elementary skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence.

  Good

  The student has advanced knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select suitable data collection methods for a variety of situations and provide reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student is skilled in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence

  Excellent

  The student has excellent knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews, observations, document analysis and others. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select accurate data collection methods for a variety of situations and justify reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student has profound skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence. The student thoroughly understands how data, analytics, and insights work together.

  Further information

  The course consists of lectures, exercises and the planning and execution of a customer related r&d project for a company or organization.
  
  Contents of the lectures:
  - Introduction: What is customer intelligence, What is academic research
  - Collecting and analyzing data in a reliable way
  - Introduction of qualitative methods
  - Introduction of quantitative methods
  - R&D process
  - Project Management principles
  
  Research and Development Project:
  Student teams find themselves a customer organization with an information and development need, execute data collection and analysis and give development suggestions based on their analysis. The outcomes will be presented in a public seminar, which is planned and managed by the students themselves.
  
  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sari Matala

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  24.08.2020 - 04.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  8 cr

  Group(s)

  20KVHN2

  19IB

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Matala, Adrián Somlósi-Kovács, Tuomo Soini

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Customer Intelligence, Research and Project Management 3B00DW25-3004 20.01.2021-15.06.2021  8 cr  (20KVHN2, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The aims of this course are threefold. It provides the students understanding in customer intelligence: how to collect and analyze customer information in a reliable and useful way. It also gives the students basic knowledge of the necessary research approaches for their final thesis and possible further studies. In addition the course includes a project management module to develop skills in managing a multicultural business project.
  
  After completing the course the student will be able to plan and execute a customer oriented research and development project in a scientifically reliable way.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Key questions:
  - What are the principles of valid and reliable research for business or
  academic world?
  - Which tools and methods can be used in increasing the understanding of
  customer needs to co-create customer value?
  - How to refine research data to customer intelligence?
  - How to communicate the results in an interesting way?
  - How to manage a research and development project successfully?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student has rudimentary knowledge of quantitative and qualitative research methods, including data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. He/she is capable of collecting and analysing basic customer data. The student has elementary skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence.

  Good

  The student has advanced knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select suitable data collection methods for a variety of situations and provide reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student is skilled in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence

  Excellent

  The student has excellent knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews, observations, document analysis and others. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select accurate data collection methods for a variety of situations and justify reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student has profound skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence. The student thoroughly understands how data, analytics, and insights work together.

  Further information

  The course consists of lectures, exercises and the planning and execution of a customer related r&d project for a company or organization.
  
  Contents of the lectures:
  - Introduction: What is customer intelligence, What is academic research
  - Collecting and analyzing data in a reliable way
  - Introduction of qualitative methods
  - Introduction of quantitative methods
  - R&D process
  - Project Management principles
  
  Research and Development Project:
  Student teams find themselves a customer organization with an information and development need, execute data collection and analysis and give development suggestions based on their analysis. The outcomes will be presented in a public seminar, which is planned and managed by the students themselves.
  
  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sari Matala

  Recommended or required reading

  Lecture slides and other material given in the lectures.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  contact teaching
  exercises
  practical work / research project (COMPULSORY)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Theory, qualitative and quantitative methods 25%
  - Project Management (exercises, project planning and reporting, final seminar arrangements) 30%
  - CI project, 45% including the written plan, execution and final report and participating & presenting in the final seminar (teamwork). Peer evaluation may affect the grade of this part.
  All parts must be passed in order to get the final grade.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  20.01.2021 - 15.06.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 10.01.2021

  Credits

  8 cr

  Group(s)

  20KVHN2

  19IB

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Matala, Adrián Somlósi-Kovács, Tuomo Soini

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  4 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Training and labour cooperation

  Student teams will find themselves a business company or other organization to be their customer in the practical Customer Intelligence / Research project and work in close cooperation with it throughout the whole course.

  Exam schedule

  Will be announced later.

  Students use of time and load

  The total of the course is 8 credits meaning about 215 hours of student work altogether. Contact teaching and consultation will be about 90 hours. Students' individual work is about 125 hours. Hence, it should be noticed that a great part of the course work is done outside the class hours both independently and in team meetings and the students are required to commit to the teamwork.
  The detailed course plan will be introduced on the first class.
  As deliverables students will produce the following:
  - contract with the customer
  - team agreement
  - project- and research plan
  - final research report
  - project end report
  - presentation (10 min) with visual material in the closing seminar (that customers will participate, too)

  Content periodicity

  Period 3
  Introduction to customer intelligence and research (S Matala)
  Quantitative methods in customer intelligence (A Kovacks)
  Qualitative methods in customer intelligence (S Matala)
  Project management (T Soini)
  Period 4
  R&D Project, coaching (T Soini, A Kovacks)
  Project management (T Soini)
  Final seminar arrangements
  Final seminar (MANDATORY PARTICIPATION)

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student has not participated team working and team project according to course implementation plan. Student shows no understanding the premises and principles of research, customer intelligence and project management.

  Satisfactory

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands the premises and principles of research, customer intelligence and project management. Student recognizes, is able to determine and use the concepts and models of customer intelligence and project management.
  The grade of the team project remains on the level 1 - 2.

  Good

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student is able to determine and apply the concepts and models of customer intelligence and project management well and is able to conduct reasoned analysis. The grade of the team project is 3 - 4.

  Excellent

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the concepts and models of customer intelligence and project management in an excellent manner. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The grade of the team project is 4 - 5 and the individual exercises as well as participation in the class are on an excellent level.

•   Customer Intelligence, Research and Project Management (PILOT VERSION) 3B00DW25-3002 31.08.2020-19.10.2020  8 cr  (20KVHN2, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The aims of this course are threefold. It provides the students understanding in customer intelligence: how to collect and analyze customer information in a reliable and useful way. It also gives the students basic knowledge of the necessary research approaches for their final thesis and possible further studies. In addition the course includes a project management module to develop skills in managing a multicultural business project.
  
  After completing the course the student will be able to plan and execute a customer oriented research and development project in a scientifically reliable way.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Key questions:
  - What are the principles of valid and reliable research for business or
  academic world?
  - Which tools and methods can be used in increasing the understanding of
  customer needs to co-create customer value?
  - How to refine research data to customer intelligence?
  - How to communicate the results in an interesting way?
  - How to manage a research and development project successfully?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student has rudimentary knowledge of quantitative and qualitative research methods, including data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. He/she is capable of collecting and analysing basic customer data. The student has elementary skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence.

  Good

  The student has advanced knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select suitable data collection methods for a variety of situations and provide reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student is skilled in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence

  Excellent

  The student has excellent knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews, observations, document analysis and others. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select accurate data collection methods for a variety of situations and justify reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student has profound skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence. The student thoroughly understands how data, analytics, and insights work together.

  Further information

  The course consists of lectures, exercises and the planning and execution of a customer related r&d project for a company or organization.
  
  Contents of the lectures:
  - Introduction: What is customer intelligence, What is academic research
  - Collecting and analyzing data in a reliable way
  - Introduction of qualitative methods
  - Introduction of quantitative methods
  - R&D process
  - Project Management principles
  
  Research and Development Project:
  Student teams find themselves a customer organization with an information and development need, execute data collection and analysis and give development suggestions based on their analysis. The outcomes will be presented in a public seminar, which is planned and managed by the students themselves.
  
  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Collaborative learning, self studies, team project

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Course evaluation consists of
  - The quality of the research plan (formulation of the research problem, ability to choose appropriate research strategy and data collection method and capability to design a credible project plan)
  - The quality of the research report (accuracy, completeness and clarity)
  - The team performance in conducting the research according to the plan (ability to collect useful information from the target group, ability to analyze data with appropriate methods)
  - Individual activity during classes and in the team (evaluated by peers and coach)
  The products and the process have approximately 50-50 weigh in the final grade.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  31.08.2020 - 19.10.2020

  Registration

  14.08.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  8 cr

  Group(s)

  20KVHN2

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Tuula Andersson, Sari Matala, Adrián Somlósi-Kovács, Annikka Lepola

  Further information for students

  This course is part of the pilot module where the studies are integrated with module studies in Innovation Management and Experience Economy, all linked with a real business life case. This course will start a larger project with a marketing research related to the business case. Open only for students who have chosen the pilot module.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  8 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Training and labour cooperation

  The research project will be conducted for a commissioner as part of a bigger development project.

  Exam schedule

  No exam

  Students use of time and load

  Intensive studies during 1st period. Students have the opportunity to concentrate on this course only. The course is 8 cr, which means approximately 216 hours of student work. When dividing it to 5 weeks, it allows students to concentrate on the project full time.

  Content periodicity

  Business case introduction and team organizing week 36.
  Basics of customer intelligence and research are given during week 37.
  Thereafter, theoretical knowledge will be acquired in the course of the project.
  Rough timeline: Research plan week 37-38, data collection weeks 38-39, data analysis and reporting weeks 40-41.

•   Customer Journey and Marketing Analysis 3B00DW61-3001 12.04.2021-07.05.2021  3 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an independent continuation to the course Marketing in the Digital World. Contemporary digital marketing analytics tools are introduced in order to give the students basic skills in measuring the effectiveness of marketing actions. The students will also learn how to efficiently use information about customer needs and use experiences to develop customer relationships. It investigates the concepts of customer journey and value creation in the context of developing integrated marketing and enhancing customer experience.
  
  After completing this course the students will be able to
  • describe and use the concept of customer journey in analyzing
  customer experience
  • use some of the digital marketing analytics tools
  • use the information to develop customer relationships and
  marketing effectiveness

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing or equivalent and Marketing in the Digital World or equivalent.

  Course contents

  What is customer journey and how is it exploited in marketing planning?
  What are the contents and meaning of value creation and customer experience in the context of customer relationships?
  What kind of marketing analytics tools are available to measure and analyze marketing effectiveness?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basics of customer journey and needs. The student can use the basic terms and can define customer experience. Student recognises and defines the importance of customer experience in marketing. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. Student has been partly active in participating in the teamwork.

  Good

  The student applies customer journey mapping methods and analytical tools accordingly. The student is able to link structures between marketing and customer experience. He/she cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

  Excellent

  The student masters the concepts and models of customer experience, journey and analytics. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned customer journey analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Articles
  - Case studies
  - Videos
  - Assigned E-books

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will consist Online Zoom lessons, individual assignments, team work, and team presentations. Projects are a continuation from Marketing in the Digital World cases.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
  - Knowing
  - Doing
  - Being
  See objectives in course description

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  12.04.2021 - 07.05.2021

  Registration

  17.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Cooperation with external businesses

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  Some of the teams may have cases from abroad.

  Students use of time and load

  The course will be intensive. Students should be prepared for even load throughout the course.

  Content periodicity

  Course content will be reviewed in the first lesson. Contact days and internal project will discuss topical digital marketing areas. External customer project will run parallel.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basics of customer journey and needs. The student can use the basic terms and can define customer experience. Student recognises and defines the importance of customer experience in marketing. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. Student has been partly active in participating in the teamwork.

  Good

  The student applies customer journey mapping methods and analytical tools accordingly. The student is able to link structures between marketing and customer experience. He/she cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

  Excellent

  The student masters the concepts and models of customer experience, journey and analytics. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned customer journey analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active

•   Customer Journey and Marketing Analysis 3B00DW61-3002 12.04.2021-07.05.2021  3 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an independent continuation to the course Marketing in the Digital World. Contemporary digital marketing analytics tools are introduced in order to give the students basic skills in measuring the effectiveness of marketing actions. The students will also learn how to efficiently use information about customer needs and use experiences to develop customer relationships. It investigates the concepts of customer journey and value creation in the context of developing integrated marketing and enhancing customer experience.
  
  After completing this course the students will be able to
  • describe and use the concept of customer journey in analyzing
  customer experience
  • use some of the digital marketing analytics tools
  • use the information to develop customer relationships and
  marketing effectiveness

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing or equivalent and Marketing in the Digital World or equivalent.

  Course contents

  What is customer journey and how is it exploited in marketing planning?
  What are the contents and meaning of value creation and customer experience in the context of customer relationships?
  What kind of marketing analytics tools are available to measure and analyze marketing effectiveness?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basics of customer journey and needs. The student can use the basic terms and can define customer experience. Student recognises and defines the importance of customer experience in marketing. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. Student has been partly active in participating in the teamwork.

  Good

  The student applies customer journey mapping methods and analytical tools accordingly. The student is able to link structures between marketing and customer experience. He/she cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

  Excellent

  The student masters the concepts and models of customer experience, journey and analytics. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned customer journey analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Articles
  - Case studies
  - Videos
  - Assigned E-books

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will consist Online Zoom lessons, individual assignments, team work, and team presentations. Projects are a continuation from Marketing in the Digital World cases.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
  - Knowing
  - Doing
  - Being
  See objectives in course description

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  12.04.2021 - 07.05.2021

  Registration

  17.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 0

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Cooperation with external businesses

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  Some of the teams may have cases from abroad.

  Students use of time and load

  The course will be intensive. Students should be prepared for even load throughout the course

  Content periodicity

  Course content will be reviewed in the first lesson. Contact days and internal project will discuss topical digital marketing areas. External customer project will run parallel.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basics of customer journey and needs. The student can use the basic terms and can define customer experience. Student recognises and defines the importance of customer experience in marketing. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. Student has been partly active in participating in the teamwork.

  Good

  The student applies customer journey mapping methods and analytical tools accordingly. The student is able to link structures between marketing and customer experience. He/she cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

  Excellent

  The student masters the concepts and models of customer experience, journey and analytics. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned customer journey analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active

•   Customer-oriented Business Design 3B00DW75-3001 11.01.2021-14.05.2021  7 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Students will learn to use service design methods. They will contact and communicate with their customers and develop their products further with them.
  
  After completing the course the student will be able to
  - develop customer-oriented product or service by using different kind of service design methods
  - take into account customers’ needs
  - contact customers

  Course contents

  Course content
  - How to test customers’ needs and interests?
  - How to use tools for designing customer-oriented products and services?
  - How to succeed in customer meetings?

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Pass:
  
  The student can apply service design methods accordingly. He/she can explain the desired outcomes of service design methods and make a plan for a service design workshop or sprint. The student can solve problems when working with service design methods. He/she can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Book list in Teams (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Team learning (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Team evaluation (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  11.01.2021 - 14.05.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 14.01.2021

  Credits

  7 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Mari Helenius

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  no exams (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  35 hours/ week (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Good

  Pass:
  The student can apply service design methods accordingly. He/she can explain the desired outcomes of service design methods and make a plan for a service design workshop or sprint. The student can solve problems when working with service design methods. He/she can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills. (not translated)

•   E-commerce Strategy and Planning 3B00FB63-3002 30.10.2020-11.12.2020  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The students will learn about strategic planning in e-commerce business model. During this course the students will learn about different kinds of strategic actions and tools that can be used in e-commerce. The student will study different strategy options and make a strategic growth plan for an e-commerce business.
  
  After completing the course student will be able to
  - make a strategic growth plan for e-commerce
  - understand e-commerce risks and management
  - define scalability possibilities and obstacles

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Prerequisite: Business Planning 1 and 2, E-commerce and Platform Economy, or equivalent (Knowledge about digital platforms)

  Course contents

  • How to create an e-commerce strategy?
  • What does a company need for a growth strategy?
  • Why strategic thinking is important?
  • Core concepts of strategic management in e-commerce
  • Prerequisite: Business planning 1 & 2, E-commerce and platform economy, or equivalent

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify principles of the business strategy and strategic planning. He/she recognizes and is able to determine elements of growth strategy. The student is able to participate in a team project performing the given tasks in according to instructions.

  Good

  The student is able to determine and apply the concept and tools of the business strategy and strategic planning. He/she is able to conduct some analysis and suggest development actions suitable for the business strategy. The student actively contributes to a team project being able to receive and give constructive feedback.

  Excellent

  The student masters the concepts and different models of strategic planning and is able to connect business strategy to e-commerce strategy. He/she is able to conduct well-structured analysis and is able to create, evaluate and combine different solutions to a given e-commerce problem. The student acts in a flexible and constructive way in team projects developing the team’s interaction.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Mari Helenius

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  30.10.2020 - 11.12.2020

  Registration

  16.09.2019 - 15.10.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Jouni Viidanoja, Mari Helenius, Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   E-commerce and Platform Economy 3B00FB61-3002 01.09.2020-18.10.2020  5 cr  (AVOINAMK) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course covers the basics of e-commerce and platform economy. The students are introduced to the theories of platform economy through variety of case studies and business examples. E-commerce ecosystems are studied and network theories applied to e-commerce ecosystems.
  After completing the course student will be able to
  - describe the theories of platform economy
  - understand the different revenue logics in e-commerce
  - define different networks, actors and interactions in ecosystem
  - build a platform economy based business model

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Prerequisite: Business Planning 1 and 2 or equivalent

  Course contents

  • Network effects
  • Digital platforms
  • Knowing, understanding and applying digital technologies
  • Building e-commerce
  • Business Model Canvas
  • Prerequisite: Business planning 1 and 2 or equivalent

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basics of e-commerce and platform economy. He/she can use the basic terms and can define e-commerce. The student recognises and defines different theories in ecosystems and e-commerce business models. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. He/she has been partly active in participating the teamwork according to the peer evaluation.

  Good

  The student has achieved the course objectives well, but needs further development. He/she can apply theories accordingly. The student is able to structure between business models and earning logic. The student cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

  Excellent

  The student has achieved the course objectives excellently. He/she masters the concepts and models of platform economy, business models and revenue models. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned e-commerce business model and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Mari Helenius

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.09.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Registration

  10.06.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  AVOINAMK

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Jouni Viidanoja, Mari Helenius, Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  Continuous education

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   E-commerce and Platform Economy 3B00FB61-3004 24.08.2020-09.10.2020  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course covers the basics of e-commerce and platform economy. The students are introduced to the theories of platform economy through variety of case studies and business examples. E-commerce ecosystems are studied and network theories applied to e-commerce ecosystems.
  After completing the course student will be able to
  - describe the theories of platform economy
  - understand the different revenue logics in e-commerce
  - define different networks, actors and interactions in ecosystem
  - build a platform economy based business model

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Prerequisite: Business Planning 1 and 2 or equivalent

  Course contents

  • Network effects
  • Digital platforms
  • Knowing, understanding and applying digital technologies
  • Building e-commerce
  • Business Model Canvas
  • Prerequisite: Business planning 1 and 2 or equivalent

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basics of e-commerce and platform economy. He/she can use the basic terms and can define e-commerce. The student recognises and defines different theories in ecosystems and e-commerce business models. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. He/she has been partly active in participating the teamwork according to the peer evaluation.

  Good

  The student has achieved the course objectives well, but needs further development. He/she can apply theories accordingly. The student is able to structure between business models and earning logic. The student cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

  Excellent

  The student has achieved the course objectives excellently. He/she masters the concepts and models of platform economy, business models and revenue models. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned e-commerce business model and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Mari Helenius

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course is held online in Tuni Moodle. Learning methods are an e-commerce project plan and a learning diary. Both are individual work. The study content is available online for each week and the student can study at his/hers own pace.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  24.08.2020 - 09.10.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Jouni Viidanoja, Mari Helenius, Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  Student knows the basics of e-commerce and platform economy. The student can use the basic terms and can define e-commerce. Student recognizes and defines different theories in ecosystems and e-commerce business models. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. Student has been partly active in participating the teamwork according to the peer evaluation.

  Good

  Student has achieved the course objectives well, but needs further development. Student applies theories accordingly. Student structures between business models and earning logic. Student cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing the final outcome with his/hers knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

  Excellent

  Student has achieved the course objectives excellently. Student masters the concepts and models of platform economy, business models and revenue models. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned e-commerce business model and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active.

•   Emergency Supply Chain Management 3B00DW67-3001 22.03.2021-19.04.2021  2 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course provides students with a brief introduction on logistics and supply chain management. It identifies the major supply chain issues in the humanitarian sector, particularly as they relate to the emergencies and also reveals the need for cross-learning between the business and the humanitarian sector.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  
  Understand the characteristics of a humanitarian supply chain management speed.
  Understand Humanitarian and emergency cycle
  Analys the Logistics cases from the ground: Red-Cross, DHL, NESA
  Understand the coordination and complexity in humanitarian SCM.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Logistics of humanitarian aid
  Preparedness
  Coordination
  Building a successfull partnership ( Private: TNT-WFP case)
  Reading materials and articles.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in emergency supply chain management.
  
  He/she has the basic understanding of humanitarian logistics in general. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations.

  Good

  The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in emergency supply chain. He/she can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of humanitarian logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. He/she contributes to the tasks and assignments during the course.

  Excellent

  The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in emergency supply chain.
  
  He/she has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of humanitarian logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants of the group. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sami Kalliokoski

  Recommended or required reading

  Book and ebook:
  Humanitarian Logistics, Tomasini Rolando etc.
  
  Material from Moodle

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online teaching

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  22.03.2021 - 19.04.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 14.01.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sami Kalliokoski

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N.A.

  Training and labour cooperation

  N.A.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in emergency supply chain management.
  He/she has the basic understanding of humanitarian logistics in general. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations.

  Good

  The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in emergency supply chain. He/she can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of humanitarian logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. He/she contributes to the tasks and assignments during the course.

  Excellent

  he student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in emergency supply chain.
  He/she has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of humanitarian logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants of the group. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course.

•   Enterprise Resource Planning 3B00DW69-3001 08.03.2021-30.04.2021  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course covers the primary ideas of Enterprise Resource Planning systems (ERP). The course focuses on SAP-system (integrated modules) from logistics point of view. It explores integration between the Transportation Management Systems (TMS) and Warehouse Management Systems (WMS). More information is available at www.logivo.fi.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  
  Define the business process model and ERP selection criterias.
  Describe what enterprise resource planning (ERP) means.
  Support ERP project implementations.
  Navigate in SAP R/3 and Business One environment.
  Work in details with the SAP AIO module (sales and distribution, Material Management,).
  Act as a SAP user: Master data, material data.
  Plan the first phases in SAP customizing.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -The Basics of logistics is a prerequisite to this course

  Course contents

  Introduction to ERP systems
  Navigation in SAP AIO
  SAP AIO without WMS
  SAP AIO with WMS in partnership with guest lecturer from Belgium
  ERP implementation project as a cmpany based assignment
  SAP customizing.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows what ERPs are, what they are used for and why. He/she recognises all the relevant organisational resources, their nature and requirements. The student is able to define the main ERP (SAP R/3 / Business One) modules and the ERP’s functional structure and how each module acquires information / contributes to other modules. The student recognises the architecture of an ERP (SAP) from user perspective regarding master and material data and is able to conduct routine operations with them. The student has also a basic understanding about organisational requirements and lifecycle stages of an ERP project.

  Good

  The student is able to explain an organisation’s business processes, especially on sales, distribution and material management with great clarity. The student has good understanding of the organisation’s value chain from raw materials to finished products and he/she is capable of applying this data within ERP. He/she has good oversight over stakeholder contacts and is able to manage the organisation’s ERP master data and, with some effort, manage stakeholder contacts and all data regarding materials, the organisation procures, produces, or keeps in stock. The student also knows which stakeholders and offerings are connected with which business processes in a given situation and he/she is capable of managing this business information with the support of ERP in daily business.

  Excellent

  The student can benchmark various ERPs from the organisation’s perspective and recognise beneficiary and disadvantageous elements for the organisation. He/she can recommend the best ERP for the organisation. The student has excellent understanding over the various resource types and he/she is able to use ERP system in automating and managing the variety of back and front office functions and their sub-stages. The student can recognise possible bottlenecks in the ERP environment and is able to customise the ERP user interface and improve its usage efficiency, especially regarding the sales and distribution (SD) module. The student has fair understanding over the functionality of other ERP modules such as financials and controlling (FICO), human resources (HR), materials management (MM) and production planning (PP).

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped class sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Remote Lab workshops
  - Project-based learning

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2021 - 30.04.2021

  Registration

  17.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Lasse Hillman, Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Hands-on approach with SAP and chosen tool in the class project

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  N/A

  Students use of time and load

  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Complete the final report and SAP exercises
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Themes will be reviewed in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows what ERPs are, what they are used for and why. He/she recognises all the relevant organisational resources, their nature and requirements. The student is able to define the main ERP (SAP R/3 / Business One) modules and the ERP’s functional structure and how each module acquires information / contributes to other modules. The student recognises the architecture of an ERP (SAP) from user perspective regarding master and material data and is able to conduct routine operations with them. The student has also a basic understanding about organisational requirements and lifecycle stages of an ERP project.

  Good

  The student is able to explain an organisation’s business processes, especially on sales, distribution and material management with great clarity. The student has good understanding of the organisation’s value chain from raw materials to finished products and he/she is capable of applying this data within ERP. He/she has good oversight over stakeholder contacts and is able to manage the organisation’s ERP master data and, with some effort, manage stakeholder contacts and all data regarding materials, the organisation procures, produces, or keeps in stock. The student also knows which stakeholders and offerings are connected with which business processes in a given situation and he/she is capable of managing this business information with the support of ERP in daily business.

  Excellent

  The student can benchmark various ERPs from the organisation’s perspective and recognise beneficiary and disadvantageous elements for the organisation. He/she can recommend the best ERP for the organisation. The student has excellent understanding over the various resource types and he/she is able to use ERP system in automating and managing the variety of back and front office functions and their sub-stages. The student can recognise possible bottlenecks in the ERP environment and is able to customise the ERP user interface and improve its usage efficiency, especially regarding the sales and distribution (SD) module. The student has fair understanding over the functionality of other ERP modules such as financials and controlling (FICO), human resources (HR), materials management (MM) and production planning (PP).

•   Experience Economy and Product Development (PILOT VERSION) 3B00DW33-3001 01.08.2020-16.12.2020  5 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Experience Economy and Product Development course is introducing the nature of experience economy and it is focused on practical designing and analyzing experience products in tourism business. Students learn the special characteristics of products and services within tourism industry. Product design model for practical product development is studied.
  
  After completing the course students are able to:
  
  Understand the nature of product development in tourism business
  Apply the experience product design tools in product development process
  Analyze the existing products and to improve the quality of experience products

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Which are the characteristics of tourism products and services?
  
  How to apply experience design tools in tourism product development in practice?
  How to analyze the existing experience products and how to improve them?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises the specific nature of product development in experience / tourism business. He/she is able to explain the process of tourism product development using design tools. The student is able to participate in analysing and improving tasks of existing experience products in a team, taking responsibility of his/her own performance.

  Good

  The student can clearly explain various aspects of the nature of product development in experience / tourism business. The student is able to do basic product analysis and apply a product design tool in the context of the experience / tourism business. The student participates actively and responsibly in the teamwork taking responsibility of team performance. The student is capable of receiving and giving feedback actively and constructively.

  Excellent

  The student is able to analyse thoroughly an existing experience product and to find and evaluate different tools appropriate for the problem at hand. He/she is able to apply the design tools in product development taking into account the specific business needs and develop highly original or innovative ideas. The student takes a leading role in a team, working in a responsible, flexible and constructive way developing the group's interaction.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 16.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 23.10.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Matala

  Further information for students

  This course is part of a pilot module, which continues from the first period. The course is open only for the pilot module students.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Final Thesis Practicalities and Research Methods 3B00DX13-3001 11.11.2020-10.11.2021  2 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This online course introduces the practical issues involved in the final thesis process. The course concentrates on giving the students necessary information and competences to begin the final thesis process. This compulsory course must be completed before the student starts the writing process under the guidance of an assigned supervisor.
  
  
  After completing the course, the student will be able to:
  Describe the different forms of final thesis as well as the principles of thesis assessment in TAMK.
  Use the guides and instructions helping and regulating the final thesis process.
  Apply the basic research approaches applicable in BBA theses.
  Write a topic analysis with an appropriate form of thesis, literature review and frame of reference.
  Manage his/her final thesis process.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What does the concept of applied research mean?
  What are the main research methods for applied research?
  How does the final thesis process go in practice?

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Pass:
  
  The student can explain the concept of applied research, understands the objectivity of a research and is able to justify the basic principles of a good research. He/she can apply a suitable quantitative or qualitative approach, including a variation of data collection methods, in his/her own thesis process. The student can give constructive feedback.
  
  
  
  Fail:
  
  The student fails to recognize the principles of an applied research and cannot define any valid research question nor research objectives on his/her own field. He/she cannot manage the assigned tasks even under supervision and his/her interaction skills are not satisfactory.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  11.11.2020 - 10.11.2021

  Registration

  11.11.2020 - 31.05.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Matala, Tuomo Soini

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Final Thesis Practicalities and Research Methods 3B00DX13-3002 01.01.2021-31.12.2021  2 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This online course introduces the practical issues involved in the final thesis process. The course concentrates on giving the students necessary information and competences to begin the final thesis process. This compulsory course must be completed before the student starts the writing process under the guidance of an assigned supervisor.
  
  
  After completing the course, the student will be able to:
  Describe the different forms of final thesis as well as the principles of thesis assessment in TAMK.
  Use the guides and instructions helping and regulating the final thesis process.
  Apply the basic research approaches applicable in BBA theses.
  Write a topic analysis with an appropriate form of thesis, literature review and frame of reference.
  Manage his/her final thesis process.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What does the concept of applied research mean?
  What are the main research methods for applied research?
  How does the final thesis process go in practice?

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Pass:
  
  The student can explain the concept of applied research, understands the objectivity of a research and is able to justify the basic principles of a good research. He/she can apply a suitable quantitative or qualitative approach, including a variation of data collection methods, in his/her own thesis process. The student can give constructive feedback.
  
  
  
  Fail:
  
  The student fails to recognize the principles of an applied research and cannot define any valid research question nor research objectives on his/her own field. He/she cannot manage the assigned tasks even under supervision and his/her interaction skills are not satisfactory.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  See Moodle course

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  On-line course with essay tasks

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Essay writing

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 31.05.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Matala, Tuomo Soini

  Further information for students

  This course must be conducted before starting thesis process.
  Check the dead lines for tasks in Moodle!

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  Pass/Fail

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Training and labour cooperation

  -

  Exam schedule

  No exam

  International connections

  -

  Students use of time and load

  Spring and Autumn semesters 2021 (Check task dead lines in Moodle course!)

  Content periodicity

  Spring and Autumn semesters 2021 (Check task dead lines in Moodle course!)

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Essays are implementing task descriptions and academic way of writing with references

•   Financial Planning 3B00DV91-3003 10.12.2020-10.12.2020  3 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course presents the common financial practices when setting up a company, planning business profitability and working capital needs. The approach is practical with case studies.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Adopt the key elements for stable financial position of a company
  • Estimate and simulate profitability, Cost-Volume-Profit analysis
  • Prepare relevant financial projections for starting a company, budgeting
  • Set the needs for working capital
  • Attach financial plans, as part of business plan

  Course contents

  • What are the factors of profitable business?
  • How to make company profit and loss budget?
  • How to estimate cash flow needs?
  • How to simulate and improve company profitability?
  • What are the local aspects of company financials?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognizes the role and meaning of management accounting in a company. He/she understands the relevant managerial accounting principles and practices used by companies. The student is able to define the importance of the financial planning process and name the important fields within management accounting. The student identifies typical management accounting tools and methods in use; he/she can make basic financial plans and managerial calculations and solve accounting cases by making simple calculations. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility as an individual learner. The student can act as part of a team.

  Good

  The student connects the role of management accounting in company operations. He/she structures the course themes with financial accounting by applying the tools and concepts used by companies. He/she explains why and how to use various management accounting methods for targeting profitable business. The student makes simple profitability calculations with simulation analysis and company's financial projections by applying the meaning of margin. The student makes relevant financial comparisons for management decisions and simulates outcome with various accounting factors. The student gives and receives constructive feedback; he/she is able to operate in professional manner by recognising relevant scope and needs. He develops his interaction skills by adding value to the team.

  Excellent

  The student adapts the course themes at advanced level. He finds and translates the course themes with working life connections. He expands the context by bringing new perspectives, he analyses the selected management accounting methods. The student adopts the financial mindset, with academic perspective. The student builds creative solutions by combining various course themes. He/she evaluates the outcomes and looks for new opportunities. He/she can justify the decisions made by using the calculations presented. The student aims for alternative perspectives; he/she brings maturity and applies relevant details as needed. The student uses the feedback and iterates his learning process. He/she adds collaboration by being an asset for the team. The student develops creative and constructive working methods by bringing professional commitment throughout the course.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  10.12.2020 - 10.12.2020

  Registration

  19.09.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Financial Planning 3B00DV91-3004 19.10.2020-10.12.2020  3 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course presents the common financial practices when setting up a company, planning business profitability and working capital needs. The approach is practical with case studies.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Adopt the key elements for stable financial position of a company
  • Estimate and simulate profitability, Cost-Volume-Profit analysis
  • Prepare relevant financial projections for starting a company, budgeting
  • Set the needs for working capital
  • Attach financial plans, as part of business plan

  Course contents

  • What are the factors of profitable business?
  • How to make company profit and loss budget?
  • How to estimate cash flow needs?
  • How to simulate and improve company profitability?
  • What are the local aspects of company financials?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognizes the role and meaning of management accounting in a company. He/she understands the relevant managerial accounting principles and practices used by companies. The student is able to define the importance of the financial planning process and name the important fields within management accounting. The student identifies typical management accounting tools and methods in use; he/she can make basic financial plans and managerial calculations and solve accounting cases by making simple calculations. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility as an individual learner. The student can act as part of a team.

  Good

  The student connects the role of management accounting in company operations. He/she structures the course themes with financial accounting by applying the tools and concepts used by companies. He/she explains why and how to use various management accounting methods for targeting profitable business. The student makes simple profitability calculations with simulation analysis and company's financial projections by applying the meaning of margin. The student makes relevant financial comparisons for management decisions and simulates outcome with various accounting factors. The student gives and receives constructive feedback; he/she is able to operate in professional manner by recognising relevant scope and needs. He develops his interaction skills by adding value to the team.

  Excellent

  The student adapts the course themes at advanced level. He finds and translates the course themes with working life connections. He expands the context by bringing new perspectives, he analyses the selected management accounting methods. The student adopts the financial mindset, with academic perspective. The student builds creative solutions by combining various course themes. He/she evaluates the outcomes and looks for new opportunities. He/she can justify the decisions made by using the calculations presented. The student aims for alternative perspectives; he/she brings maturity and applies relevant details as needed. The student uses the feedback and iterates his learning process. He/she adds collaboration by being an asset for the team. The student develops creative and constructive working methods by bringing professional commitment throughout the course.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  19.10.2020 - 10.12.2020

  Registration

  19.09.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Financial Statements 3B00DW07-3005 08.03.2021-31.07.2021  2 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will continue bookkeeping in virtual companies. At the end of the course they will prepare the financial statements.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Record basic business transactions in accounting
  • Prepare income statement and balance sheet for a small firm

  Course contents

  • How are business transactions recorded in accounting?
  • How are financial statements prepared?
  • What do annual reports include?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise and define fundamentals of financial accounting, income statement and balance sheet. The student knows the basic functions of bookkeeping software. The student can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work in individual and team assignments.

  Good

  The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting. He/she knows how income statement and balance sheet are prepared. The student can use bookkeeping software at a basic level. The student takes responsibility and commits to group activities in addition to his/her own work.

  Excellent

  The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting and financial statements in an excellent manner. The student is able to analyse financial statements and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student can use bookkeeping software well at a basic level. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Material in Moodle
  - Accounting and Finance, An Introduction. Eddie McLaney and Peter Atrill. Pearson. 2016 or similar book.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - lectures (Zoom)
  - assignments
  - teamwork
  - bookkeeping of practice firm

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2021 - 31.07.2021

  Registration

  17.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Seats

  15 - 0

  Teacher(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  --

  Exam schedule

  Course exam in April 2021
  First retake exam on 28th of May,2021
  Second retake exam in September, 2021

  International connections

  -- (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  2 ECTS = 54 hours

•   Financial Statements 3B00DW07-3006 08.03.2021-31.07.2021  2 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will continue bookkeeping in virtual companies. At the end of the course they will prepare the financial statements.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Record basic business transactions in accounting
  • Prepare income statement and balance sheet for a small firm

  Course contents

  • How are business transactions recorded in accounting?
  • How are financial statements prepared?
  • What do annual reports include?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise and define fundamentals of financial accounting, income statement and balance sheet. The student knows the basic functions of bookkeeping software. The student can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work in individual and team assignments.

  Good

  The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting. He/she knows how income statement and balance sheet are prepared. The student can use bookkeeping software at a basic level. The student takes responsibility and commits to group activities in addition to his/her own work.

  Excellent

  The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting and financial statements in an excellent manner. The student is able to analyse financial statements and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student can use bookkeeping software well at a basic level. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Material in Moodle
  - Accounting and Finance, An Introduction. Eddie McLaney and Peter Atrill. Pearson. 2016 or similar book.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - lectures (Zoom)
  - assignments
  - teamwork
  - bookkeeping of practice firm

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2021 - 31.07.2021

  Registration

  17.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Seats

  15 - 0

  Teacher(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  --

  Exam schedule

  Course exam in April 2021
  First retake exam on 28th of May,2021
  Second retake exam in September, 2021

  International connections

  -- (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  2 ECTS = 54 hours

•   Finnish as Foreign Language 1 3B00DW21-3002 11.01.2021-01.07.2021  5 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course provides the basics of the Finnish language and culture (estimated level A1.2)
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Use the basic structure of Finnish.
  • Manage in Finnish in basic situations like simple shopping and travelling.
  • Learn to build up their vocabulary.
  • Know forms of politeness in Finnish.
  • Know how to write brief messages connected to everyday life.

  Course contents

  • How is Finnish pronounced?
  • Why do I need to pay attention to how words are written?
  • How to make simple statements, ask questions and answer them?
  • How to write short messages in Finnish?
  • What to say in situations like shopping, travelling in Finland?
  • How to be polite, and build up small talk in Finnish?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student has completed all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. The student is able to tell a few things about oneself in Finnish comprehensively. The student recognises typical grammatic structures like possessive structure, verb types and partitive.

  Good

  The student has an active attitude towards studying Finnish language and culture showing that by completing written tasks according to the schedule. The student is able to use the typical grammatic structures like possessive structure, verb types and partitive in simple sentences. He/she is able to cope in most common everyday situations like introducing and shopping and tell simple things about his/her day, family, spare time etc. The student is able to write brief messages (e.g. e-mail, text message, and post card) in Finnish and is able to pronounce Finnish clearly enough.

  Excellent

  The student has a positive and active attitude towards learning Finnish and is genuinely interested in Finnish culture, and brings it up by comparing Finnish culture to his/her own. He/she can pronounce Finnish distinctively and is able to use suitable and varied expressions in everyday situations using grammar almost correctly. The student is able to write brief texts in Finnish, which are mostly correct.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Minna-Kaisa Korpela

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  11.01.2021 - 01.07.2021

  Registration

  01.11.2020 - 18.01.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB1

  20IB

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB5

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Minna-Kaisa Korpela

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Finnish as a Foreign Language 2 3B00DW83-3002 01.08.2020-31.12.2020  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course builds up the knowledge and use of Finnish language in everyday situations, and it also provides wider perspective to Finnish culture. Estimated level A2.1.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Tell about future plans to a Finn in common situations.
  Understand standard business related messages in Finnish.
  Understand standard spoken Finnish.
  Communicate with Finns in typical occasions.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  - Finnish as a Foreign Language 1 (5 cr) or equivalent knowledge.

  Course contents

  How to express plans in good and clear manner in Finnish, spoken and written?
  How to actively broaden vocabulary in daily situations?
  How to understand basic business communication in Finnish?
  What are the most common features of spoken Finnish?
  How to become an observer of Finnish culture and learn about that?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises typical grammatical structures like local cases and object. He/she is able to tell some things about his/her future plans (e.g. travelling) in Finnish in most common situations. He/she is able to tell some simple things of the past and cope to some extent in situations in which Finns use spoken language.

  Good

  The student has an active attitude towards studying the Finnish language and culture showing that by completing written tasks. The student is able to use typical grammatical structures like local cases and object in simple sentences. He/she is able to tell about future plans in simple ways understandable in common situations. The student is able to talk about the past and explain his/her ideas and plans understandably. He/she comprehends main topics in everyday conversations with Finns who talk standard spoken language.

  Excellent

  The student has a positive and active attitude towards learning the language and is genuinely interested in Finnish culture, and brings it up by expressing his/her findings about cultural matters. The student is able to talk understandably about the past and express himself/herself in various ways. He/she can cope in situations with Finns talking standard spoken Finnish, when topics are related to matters he/she is interested in, and/or when topics concern everyday life.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 31.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20IB

  Teacher(s)

  Ella Hakala

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Finnish as a Foreign Language 3 3B00DW85-3001 01.01.2021-31.07.2021  2 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course builds up the use of Finnish and provides the knowledge and practices how to act as a job applicant. Estimated level A2.2.
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  Search work on the internet and from other sources
  Get information on available jobs
  Write a job application in Finnish

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Finnish as a Foreign Language 1 and Finnish as a Foreign Language 2 completed or equivalent knowledge.10 credits of studies up to the level A2.1.

  Course contents

  How to communicate in Finnish in business context?
  How to find information on available jobs?
  How to apply for a job?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to tell about his/her future plans and things from the past in Finnish in most common situations using the typical grammatical structures. He/she is able to give a brief speech in Finnish in simple sentences. He/she is able to write a brief attachment for CV. He/she needs help in order to understand texts only in Finnish informing about available jobs.

  Good

  The student has an active attitude towards studying the Finnish language and culture, and shows that by completing written tasks according to the schedule. He/she is able to tell about future plans and the past understandably in common situations using typical grammatical structures correctly. The student is able to explain his/her ideas and plans clearly. The student understands main topics in everyday conversations with Finns who talk standard spoken language. He/she is able to write a job application and CV in standard expressions. He/she is able to search for available jobs and understand texts with the help of dictionary. The student is able to give a speech in Finnish in standard Finnish sentences.

  Excellent

  The student has a positive and active attitude towards learning language and is genuinely interested in Finnish culture, and brings it up by expressing his/her findings about cultural matters. He/she can cope in situations with Finns talking standard spoken Finnish, when topics are related to matters he/she is interested in, and/or topics concerning everyday life. He/she is able to search for available jobs and understand easily texts, which are related to his/her interests and include more complicated structures. He/she can write a job application and CV in detailed manner. He/she is able to give a speech with a meaningful content, speaking fluently in versatile Finnish sentences.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Ella Hakala

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2021 - 31.07.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 14.01.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20IB

  21IB

  Teacher(s)

  Ella Hakala

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Global Business Trends 3B00CX29-3003 03.09.2020-26.11.2020  5 cr  (20KVHN2, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course focuses on the increasing importance of the international dimension of business. The students choose one major theme for their independent learning project which concentrates on one major theory or framework to broaden their understanding of international business strategies to prepare students for an internationally oriented career. There are internationalization business topics covered in areas of: Financing, taxation, organization, management, business policies, marketing, human resources, political risk assessment, E-commerce and economic integration.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Have an ability to assess the effects of major economic, management, social and technical trends and factors on businesses operating internationally.
  Have an understanding of shifting competitive advantage and international strategy formation and evolution in major manufacturing and service sectors.
  Have the ability to use relevant sources of information to carry out research in their chosen topic.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What are the critical issues in international business?
  How to conduct an individual/group project on international business issue?
  How to integrate theory with practice through research/development oriented project?

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Kai Hintsanen

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will be delivered online using Tuni Moodle. Live sessions will be held via Zoom. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  03.09.2020 - 26.11.2020

  Registration

  10.06.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20KVHN2

  18IB

  16IB

  17IB

  Seats

  0 - 30

  Teacher(s)

  Annikka Lepola, Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  1 cr

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  - The student shows some basic understanding of the future business trends.
  - The student is aware of the changes that are taking place in international business
  - The student is able to give examples of some of the business megatrends

  Good

  - The student shows advanced understanding of the future trends in international business
  - The student is able to give examples of the effects of digitalization, robotization, climate change, smart cities and other future trends and their impact on doing business.
  - The student is able to demonstrate how those trends will affect doing business.

  Excellent

  - The student is able to analyze economically and operationally how the future megatrends will affect doing international business.
  - The student can prepare and perform an industry level briefing on the charasteristics of the chosen field's future trends.
  - The student takes it for granted that the future trends are very much different from the past ones.

•   Global Economics 3B00DW13-3004 08.03.2021-31.05.2021  3 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  National economies are an integral part of the global economy. Issues and events in global economy have strong influence upon the function of national economy.
  The course aims at familiarizing the students with global institutions, agreements, events, trends and their relationship to the national economy.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  • Understand the benefits of specialization and the impact on trade and investment
  • Know trade barriers and their background factors
  • Understand exchange and interest rate mechanisms
  • Conceptualize the role of global organizations
  • Understand trade liberalization and regional economic integration
  • Relationships among national economy, national debt and the international rating agencies

  Course contents

  • What are the benefits of global trade?
  • What are the main international trade theories?
  • What are the effects of trade barriers on national economies?
  • What are the reasons behind exchange and interest rate volatility?
  • What is the role of economic integration in world trade?
  • How the rating agencies influence national borrowing rate?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can give the fundamentals for the question: What is global economics about? He/she recognises the difference between micro and macro economy and is able to name essential factors in the field of macro economy. He/she manages to identify the factors that affect an economy. The student can give and receive feedback.

  Good

  The student applies the connections between global economic factors like GDP, GNP, inflation, interest rates and other relevant macro-economic factors. He/she knows the relevant terms and connections and can explain basic cause-effect relationships. He/she sees the importance of global trade and adopts various macro theories. The student gives and receives constructive feedback and develops his/her skills for co-operation.

  Excellent

  The student analyses and translates the connections within global economy factors. He/she can generalise complicated theories by seeing the relevancy behind the economic signals. He/she can explain economic fluctuations and reasons behind them. He/she justifies outcome for various global assumptions, formulating the impacts of GDP, inflation, employment and other factors related. He/she finds the links between global economy factors by evaluating the information available. The student uses feedback to grow professionally, he/she develops creative and flexible mindset and works in a responsible manner.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  The course is based on lecturing slides and observing macro economy news in media. The purpose is to read and follow the latest economic news.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  On-line Lecturing, discussion, working in teams

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The report evaluation is based on reports, with the following criteria:
  - Level of analysis
  - Creativity
  - Content and details
  - Bringing the message
  - Report layout and text

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2021 - 31.05.2021

  Registration

  17.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Seats

  15 - 35

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  3 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  The course evaluation is based on report, theme related to Global economy

  Exam schedule

  No exam. The course evaluation is based on report, Requirements with details to be informed during the first lecture

  International connections

  An international course, BBA

  Students use of time and load

  The course 3 credits are based on lectures and individual information seeking and making the report

  Content periodicity

  There are 4 lectures, the reports are to be submitted by given deadline after the course

•   Global Economics 3B00DW13-3005 08.03.2021-31.07.2021  3 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  National economies are an integral part of the global economy. Issues and events in global economy have strong influence upon the function of national economy.
  The course aims at familiarizing the students with global institutions, agreements, events, trends and their relationship to the national economy.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  • Understand the benefits of specialization and the impact on trade and investment
  • Know trade barriers and their background factors
  • Understand exchange and interest rate mechanisms
  • Conceptualize the role of global organizations
  • Understand trade liberalization and regional economic integration
  • Relationships among national economy, national debt and the international rating agencies

  Course contents

  • What are the benefits of global trade?
  • What are the main international trade theories?
  • What are the effects of trade barriers on national economies?
  • What are the reasons behind exchange and interest rate volatility?
  • What is the role of economic integration in world trade?
  • How the rating agencies influence national borrowing rate?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can give the fundamentals for the question: What is global economics about? He/she recognises the difference between micro and macro economy and is able to name essential factors in the field of macro economy. He/she manages to identify the factors that affect an economy. The student can give and receive feedback.

  Good

  The student applies the connections between global economic factors like GDP, GNP, inflation, interest rates and other relevant macro-economic factors. He/she knows the relevant terms and connections and can explain basic cause-effect relationships. He/she sees the importance of global trade and adopts various macro theories. The student gives and receives constructive feedback and develops his/her skills for co-operation.

  Excellent

  The student analyses and translates the connections within global economy factors. He/she can generalise complicated theories by seeing the relevancy behind the economic signals. He/she can explain economic fluctuations and reasons behind them. He/she justifies outcome for various global assumptions, formulating the impacts of GDP, inflation, employment and other factors related. He/she finds the links between global economy factors by evaluating the information available. The student uses feedback to grow professionally, he/she develops creative and flexible mindset and works in a responsible manner.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  The course is based on lecturing slides and observing macro economy news in media. The purpose is to read and follow the latest economic news.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  On-line Lecturing and working in teams

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2021 - 31.07.2021

  Registration

  17.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Seats

  15 - 35

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  The course evaluation is based on report, theme related to Global economy

  Exam schedule

  No exam. The course evaluation is based on report, Requirements with details to be informed during the first lecture

  International connections

  An international course, BBA

  Students use of time and load

  The course 3 credits are based on lectures and individual information seeking and making the report

  Content periodicity

  There are 4 lectures, the reports are to be submitted by given deadline after the course

•   Go to Market 3B00DW77-3001 01.01.2021-14.05.2021  8 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  A Go to market plan is an action plan that specifies how a company will reach customers and achieve competitive advantage. During this course students will learn about different kind of go to market -actions and -tools. They will sell and plan marketing for their products. They will also visit different startups and events to learn about startup scene in Finland.
  
  After completing the course the student will be able to
  - do impactful go to market -plan
  - can improve customer relationship from basic level to partnership level
  - can sell
  - Knows the characteristics of a startup

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Course content
  - How to make impactful go to market –plan?
  - What is the difference between startups and little companies?
  - How does the startup scene is working in Finland?
  - How to pitch the business idea effectively for the investors?

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Pass:
  
  The student can apply knowledge to make an impactful go-to-market plan. He/she applies needed information accordingly. The student can select the most appropriate course of action from diverse options and justify his/her choice. He/she can give and receive feedback actively and constructively. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Book list in Teams

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Team learning

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2021 - 14.05.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 14.01.2021

  Credits

  8 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Mari Helenius

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  None (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  35 hours / week (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Good

  Pass:
  The student can apply knowledge to make an impactful go-to-market plan. He/she applies needed information accordingly. The student can select the most appropriate course of action from diverse options and justify his/her choice. He/she can give and receive feedback actively and constructively. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills (not translated)

•   Human Resource Management 3B00DW39-3002 23.10.2020-11.12.2020  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course deals with theories, models and techniques for recruitment, management, maintenance and development of competence based human resources for contemporary multi-skilled- virtual-, and network based organizations.
  
  
  After completing of the course, students will be able to:
  
  Perform basic functions of HRM; staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance.
  
  Define long term HR needs for a company.
  
  Develop company-wide HR policy.
  
  Maintain contact with labor union concerning different company issues.
  
  Deal with multi-skilled workforce.
  
  Integrate effectively ICT to HRM.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  First year BBA studies or equivalent studies for the exchange students

  Course contents

  How the contemporary workplace is changing and how the change process is affecting the HRM?
  
  Why strategic HR planning is necessary for an organization?
  
  What are the different steps in strategic HR planning?
  
  How to effectively perform basic functions of HRM?
  
  How the digitalization process is affecting HR performance?
  
  What are the basic issues to remember in international HRM?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise basic concepts of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she has a basic understanding of the long-term HR needs for a company and can participate in developing a company-wide HR policy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work. The student can give and receive feedback but considers and assesses things from his/her own viewpoints. The student has the skills to be part of the group dealing with the labour union.

  Good

  The student can explain the good practices of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she can explain diverse alternatives for the various HR activities and in addition, can be part of creating a new HR policy for a firm. He/she can help to select good actions for solving HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills further. The student can help to deal with the labour union.

  Excellent

  The student understands the good practices of and the relationships between employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. The student is able to assist in defining the long-term HR needs for a company. He/she can assess diverse alternatives for the various HR activities, can help to create a new HR policy for a firm and solve HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly, constructively and flexibly with a diverse group of colleagues in solving practical problems. In case of need, the student can deal with the labour union.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Human Resource Management (9th edition or the newer publication), Gary Dessler, Prentice Hall

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact teaching
  Study conversation
  Individual task
  Project
  Presentation

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Individual task, project and presentation

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  23.10.2020 - 11.12.2020

  Registration

  16.09.2020 - 15.10.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Erja Koivula-Nurmilaakso, Shaidul Kazi

  Further information for students

  Though the contact lessons have been mentioned, if situation requires, the whole course may be taught online.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  5 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Contact to the course teacher

  Training and labour cooperation

  The course project wil be done in pairs or in small groups and it will be based on an interview with a human resource manager of a company.

  Exam schedule

  There is no test but project, presentation and individual task.

  International connections

  Open

  Students use of time and load

  - Total resource hurs= 27x5 = 135
  - Contact meeting 7 (7 x 3): 21 hours
  - Project: 30 hours
  - Individual task: 30 hours
  - Reading: 47 hours

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Not done the project, presentation and at least two of the individual tasks

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise basic concepts of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she has a basic understanding of the long-term HR needs for a company and can participate in developing a company-wide HR policy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work. The student can give and receive feedback but considers and assesses things from his/her own viewpoints. The student has the skills to be part of the group dealing with the labour union.

  Good

  The student can explain the good practices of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she can explain diverse alternatives for the various HR activities and in addition, can be part of creating a new HR policy for a firm. He/she can help to select good actions for solving HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills further. The student can help to deal with the labour union.

  Excellent

  The student understands the good practices of and the relationships between employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. The student is able to assist in defining the long-term HR needs for a company. He/she can assess diverse alternatives for the various HR activities, can help to create a new HR policy for a firm and solve HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly, constructively and flexibly with a diverse group of colleagues in solving practical problems. In case of need, the student can deal with the labour union.

•   Human Resource Management 3B00DW39-3001 23.10.2020-11.12.2020  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course deals with theories, models and techniques for recruitment, management, maintenance and development of competence based human resources for contemporary multi-skilled- virtual-, and network based organizations.
  
  
  After completing of the course, students will be able to:
  
  Perform basic functions of HRM; staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance.
  
  Define long term HR needs for a company.
  
  Develop company-wide HR policy.
  
  Maintain contact with labor union concerning different company issues.
  
  Deal with multi-skilled workforce.
  
  Integrate effectively ICT to HRM.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  First year BBA studies or equivalent studies for the exchange students

  Course contents

  How the contemporary workplace is changing and how the change process is affecting the HRM?
  
  Why strategic HR planning is necessary for an organization?
  
  What are the different steps in strategic HR planning?
  
  How to effectively perform basic functions of HRM?
  
  How the digitalization process is affecting HR performance?
  
  What are the basic issues to remember in international HRM?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise basic concepts of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she has a basic understanding of the long-term HR needs for a company and can participate in developing a company-wide HR policy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work. The student can give and receive feedback but considers and assesses things from his/her own viewpoints. The student has the skills to be part of the group dealing with the labour union.

  Good

  The student can explain the good practices of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she can explain diverse alternatives for the various HR activities and in addition, can be part of creating a new HR policy for a firm. He/she can help to select good actions for solving HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills further. The student can help to deal with the labour union.

  Excellent

  The student understands the good practices of and the relationships between employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. The student is able to assist in defining the long-term HR needs for a company. He/she can assess diverse alternatives for the various HR activities, can help to create a new HR policy for a firm and solve HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly, constructively and flexibly with a diverse group of colleagues in solving practical problems. In case of need, the student can deal with the labour union.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Shaidul Kazi

  Recommended or required reading

  Human Resource Management (9th edition or the newer publication), Gary Dessler, Prentice Hall

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact teaching
  Study conversation
  Individual task
  Project
  Presentation

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Individual task, project and presentation

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  23.10.2020 - 11.12.2020

  Registration

  16.09.2020 - 15.10.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Erja Koivula-Nurmilaakso, Shaidul Kazi

  Further information for students

  Though the contact lessons have been mentioned, if situation requires, the whole course may be taught online.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  5 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Contact to the course teacher

  Training and labour cooperation

  The course project wil be done in pairs or in small groups and it will be based on an interview with a human resource manager of a company.

  Exam schedule

  There is no test but project, presentation and individual task.

  International connections

  Open

  Students use of time and load

  - Total resource hurs= 27x5 = 135
  - Contact meeting 7 (7 x 3): 21 hours
  - Project: 30 hours
  - Individual task: 30 hours
  - Reading: 47 hours

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Not done the project, presentation and at least two of the individual tasks

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise basic concepts of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she has a basic understanding of the long-term HR needs for a company and can participate in developing a company-wide HR policy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work. The student can give and receive feedback but considers and assesses things from his/her own viewpoints. The student has the skills to be part of the group dealing with the labour union.

  Good

  The student can explain the good practices of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she can explain diverse alternatives for the various HR activities and in addition, can be part of creating a new HR policy for a firm. He/she can help to select good actions for solving HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills further. The student can help to deal with the labour union.

  Excellent

  The student understands the good practices of and the relationships between employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. The student is able to assist in defining the long-term HR needs for a company. He/she can assess diverse alternatives for the various HR activities, can help to create a new HR policy for a firm and solve HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly, constructively and flexibly with a diverse group of colleagues in solving practical problems. In case of need, the student can deal with the labour union.

•   Information and Communication Technology Skills 3B00DW15-3003 01.08.2020-31.12.2020  3 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course focuses on learning the basic concepts of information communication technology (ICT) and how to use computers in business perspective. The widely known MS-Office package is in use, with practical approach.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Use computer and its operating system.
  • Create documents, calculations, presentations and communicate by using MS-Office.
  • Further develop their practical ICT skills.

  Course contents

  • How to make business documents, where to save and how to print?
  • How to make business spreadsheet calculations and charts?
  • How to make business presentations?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basic ICT terms, is familiar with the basic MS Office tools (Excel, PowerPoint, and Word), and can use them. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student is able to use a cloud environment for sharing information. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studying but may still need some support or supervision for using the tools and working in a group.

  Good

  The student recognises well the basic ICT terms, is familiar with the basic MS Office tools (Excel, PowerPoint, Word) and can tailor their use based on the outcome required. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student uses cloud environment efficiently for sharing information. The student can do the given tasks independently and is able to support other team members.

  Excellent

  The student can broadly and independently apply the MS Office tools and cloud environment. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student is very self-confident in solving problems in his/her application area, can explain and teach the tools and methods to others and help his/her team mates in their ICT problems.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Most of material is in the explainer videos mainly published in Youtube. Some of those videos are public and some are hidden. There is also some additional material in the course Moodle(Tabula). That is in the form of additional videos, internet links, example files and links to written material.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will be hold in online learning. Examples, demonstrations and workshops using the Zoom environment (also Microsoft Teams). Explainer and instructive videos in Moodle(Tabula) environment.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The final grade is based on personal projects which are checked against timetable, demands, documentation and the quality of the solution. Documentation details can be found from the assignment sections. Using the Onedrive cloud is also one part of the documentation. The details and the grading of the projects will be published in the first lectures. The details of the grading can be found also from course Moodle (Tabula).

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 31.12.2020

  Registration

  10.06.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Pekka Kaatiala

  Further information for students

  Follow the course Moodle (Tabula).

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Contact the course lecture.
  
  One possible way could be to produce a set of self made and self designed explainer videos concerning Office 365 environment. After that an business / financial / marketing application problem could be solved and documented with enough examples and details.
  
  No private (personal) guidance is given in this kind of way.

  Exam schedule

  No final exam. The assessment is based on personal projects, the result of the projects and the documentation of the results and the implementation. Also keeping in the schedules is one part of the assessment.
  More detailed instructions will be given in the practical work instructions.

  Students use of time and load

  Total 80 hours. Self-promoted working is about 50 hours. Demonstrations, workshops, coaching and contact online lessons alltogether is about 24-30 hours.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  No practical work is returned within the given time limits. Or the returned practical work does not meet the given minimum requirements.

  Satisfactory

  "Introductory knowledge". The student knows the basic of the MS Office tools and Onedrive cloud environment. The student can take responsibility of his own studying and needs some support from his team mates. The student follows the project schedulings with minor changes.

  Good

  "Basic knowledge": The student knows the possibilities of the MS Office tools and Onedrive cloud environment. The student can do independently the projects and can also support his group and team mates. The student can follow the course timetables and project schedulings.

  Excellent

  "Advanced knowledge": The student can broadly and independently apply the MS Office tools and Onedrive cloud environment. The student is very self motivated in solving problems in his application area and he can take responsibility of his group and team mates. The student follows exactly the course timetables and is faithful to agreed schedulings.

•   Information and Communication Technology Skills 3B00DW15-3004 01.08.2020-31.12.2020  3 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course focuses on learning the basic concepts of information communication technology (ICT) and how to use computers in business perspective. The widely known MS-Office package is in use, with practical approach.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Use computer and its operating system.
  • Create documents, calculations, presentations and communicate by using MS-Office.
  • Further develop their practical ICT skills.

  Course contents

  • How to make business documents, where to save and how to print?
  • How to make business spreadsheet calculations and charts?
  • How to make business presentations?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basic ICT terms, is familiar with the basic MS Office tools (Excel, PowerPoint, and Word), and can use them. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student is able to use a cloud environment for sharing information. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studying but may still need some support or supervision for using the tools and working in a group.

  Good

  The student recognises well the basic ICT terms, is familiar with the basic MS Office tools (Excel, PowerPoint, Word) and can tailor their use based on the outcome required. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student uses cloud environment efficiently for sharing information. The student can do the given tasks independently and is able to support other team members.

  Excellent

  The student can broadly and independently apply the MS Office tools and cloud environment. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student is very self-confident in solving problems in his/her application area, can explain and teach the tools and methods to others and help his/her team mates in their ICT problems.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Most of material is in the explainer videos mainly published in Youtube. Some of those videos are public and some are hidden. There is also some additional material in the course Moodle(Tabula). That is in the form of additional videos, internet links, example files and links to written material.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will be hold in online learning. Examples, demonstrations and workshops using the Zoom environment (also Microsoft Teams). Explainer and instructive videos in Moodle(Tabula) environment.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The final grade is based on personal projects which are checked against timetable, demands, documentation and the quality of the solution. Documentation details can be found from the assignment sections. Using the Onedrive cloud is also one part of the documentation. The details and the grading of the projects will be published in the first lectures. The details of the grading can be found also from course Moodle (Tabula).

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 31.12.2020

  Registration

  10.06.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Pekka Kaatiala

  Further information for students

  Follow the course Moodle (Tabula).

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Contact the course lecture.
  
  One possible way could be to produce a set of self made and self designed explainer videos concerning Office 365 environment. After that an business / financial / marketing application problem could be solved and documented with enough examples and details.
  
  No private (personal) guidance is given in this kind of way.

  Exam schedule

  No final exam. The assessment is based on personal projects, the result of the projects and the documentation of the results and the implementation. Also keeping in the schedules is one part of the assessment.
  More detailed instructions will be given in the practical work instructions.

  Students use of time and load

  Total 80 hours. Self-promoted working is about 50 hours. Demonstrations, workshops, coaching and contact online lessons alltogether is about 24-30 hours.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  No practical work is returned within the given time limits. Or the returned practical work does not meet the given minimum requirements.

  Satisfactory

  "Introductory knowledge". The student knows the basic of the MS Office tools and Onedrive cloud environment. The student can take responsibility of his own studying and needs some support from his team mates. The student follows the project schedulings with minor changes.

  Good

  "Basic knowledge": The student knows the possibilities of the MS Office tools and Onedrive cloud environment. The student can do independently the projects and can also support his group and team mates. The student can follow the course timetables and project schedulings.

  Excellent

  "Advanced knowledge": The student can broadly and independently apply the MS Office tools and Onedrive cloud environment. The student is very self motivated in solving problems in his application area and he can take responsibility of his group and team mates. The student follows exactly the course timetables and is faithful to agreed schedulings.

•   InnoEvent 3O00CE17-3009 01.08.2020-31.12.2020  2 cr  (18IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  InnoEvent Tampere is an intensive week during which students of different fields of study are divided into multi-disciplinary teams. These teams innovate and create solutions to real cases given by a variety of companies and organizations (employers). Teachers, professionals and company representatives guide the innovation project. At the end of the week every team presents their achievement for a team of judges who selects the best ideas and awards the teams during the final gala.
  
  During the InnoEvent student become familiar with teamwork, development of new products or services and selling ideas to customers.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Language of instruction is English

  Course contents

  During the InnoEvent students work in teams and develop new solutions for the company´s assignments.

  Further information

  Lauha Peltonen, 040-8016849, lauha.peltonen@tamk.fi

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Hanna Pihlajarinne

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 31.12.2020

  Registration

  01.10.2020 - 15.11.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  18IB

  Teacher(s)

  Hanna Pihlajarinne

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Innovations and Business Management 3B00DW45-3001 24.08.2020-23.09.2020  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Learning outcomes of the course:
  The course provides a theoretical overview and the tools for creating innovations for profitable business. Using service creation as a tool, it provides insights of product and services development process and the positioning of innovation into right marketplace. Also, creating a reasonable business model and basics of ensuring the intellectual property rights (IPR’s) are discussed.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  • Understand the different aspects of innovation, and its role in developing a business
  • Recognize, assess and suggests solutions for supporting organizations innovation performance
  • Apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings
  • Evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services
  • Understand the product and service design process phases
  • Identify the critical phases of product and service design projects

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  How to foster innovations?
  How to develop products and services from innovations?
  What are intellectual property rights and how to ensure them?
  How to evaluate project business feasibility?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing a business. He/she can recognise solutions for supporting an organisation’s innovation performance. The student is able to apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings. He/she can evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student recognises the different phases in the product and service design process.

  Good

  The student is familiar with the different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing and growing a business. He/she can recognise and assess solutions for supporting an organisation’s innovation performance. The student understands the strategies most effective for exploiting innovations. The student is able to apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings. He/she can evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student can plan, implement and assess the different phases of the product and service design process. He/she can identify critical phases of product and service design projects.

  Excellent

  The student has in-depth understanding of the different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing and growing a business. He/she can recognise, assess and advocate the most suitable solutions for improving an organisation's innovation performance. The student can develop and implement the most effective strategies for exploiting innovations. The student is able to implement innovation theories into practice in a variety of business settings. He/she can boost the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student can plan, implement and assess the different phases of the product and service design process. He/she can tackle critical phases of product and service design projects.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sven Rassl

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will be delivered online using Tuni Moodle. Live sessions will be held via Zoom. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  24.08.2020 - 23.09.2020

  Registration

  10.06.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Innovations and Business Management (PILOT VERSION) 3B00DW45-3002 05.10.2020-31.10.2020  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Learning outcomes of the course:
  The course provides a theoretical overview and the tools for creating innovations for profitable business. Using service creation as a tool, it provides insights of product and services development process and the positioning of innovation into right marketplace. Also, creating a reasonable business model and basics of ensuring the intellectual property rights (IPR’s) are discussed.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  • Understand the different aspects of innovation, and its role in developing a business
  • Recognize, assess and suggests solutions for supporting organizations innovation performance
  • Apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings
  • Evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services
  • Understand the product and service design process phases
  • Identify the critical phases of product and service design projects

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  How to foster innovations?
  How to develop products and services from innovations?
  What are intellectual property rights and how to ensure them?
  How to evaluate project business feasibility?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing a business. He/she can recognise solutions for supporting an organisation’s innovation performance. The student is able to apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings. He/she can evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student recognises the different phases in the product and service design process.

  Good

  The student is familiar with the different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing and growing a business. He/she can recognise and assess solutions for supporting an organisation’s innovation performance. The student understands the strategies most effective for exploiting innovations. The student is able to apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings. He/she can evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student can plan, implement and assess the different phases of the product and service design process. He/she can identify critical phases of product and service design projects.

  Excellent

  The student has in-depth understanding of the different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing and growing a business. He/she can recognise, assess and advocate the most suitable solutions for improving an organisation's innovation performance. The student can develop and implement the most effective strategies for exploiting innovations. The student is able to implement innovation theories into practice in a variety of business settings. He/she can boost the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student can plan, implement and assess the different phases of the product and service design process. He/she can tackle critical phases of product and service design projects.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sven Rassl

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  05.10.2020 - 31.10.2020

  Registration

  14.08.2020 - 19.10.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Tuula Andersson, Annikka Lepola

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  3 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   International Brand Management 3B00DW57-3001 02.02.2021-22.04.2021  5 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is executed in co-operation with TAMK international partner universities. The students work with a branding project in teams consisting of members from several universities, using virtual communication tools: social media, video meetings and cloud services. In the project the students will learn how to analyze and develop a brand in an international context but quite as importantly how to deal with cultural differences in an international project.
  
  After completing the course the students will be able to
  - describe and apply a theoretical framework for developing a
  brand
  - analyze and evaluate strengths and development areas of a
  brand
  - create or develop a brand strategy for a product, service or a
  company
  - work in an international project using virtual communication
  tools

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing 1 and 2 or equivalent

  Course contents

  How do international companies manage their brand development?
  Which aspects in consumer behavior are crucial in the brand marketing?
  How to cope with cultural differences affecting project work in an international context?
  How to use modern virtual communication tools in an international project?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to recognise the basic concepts of branding. He/she is able to conduct his/her part and participate in the brand strategy development assignment, with assistance, following instructions. The student participates in the international teamwork and is able to recognise his/her contribution to the task.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the structure of brand strategy and brand image as tools of brand management. He/she is able to research the business environment of a brand for developing a brand strategy. The student is able to develop a brand strategy plan. The student acts as an active member of an international project team, takes responsibility of his/her own work and is able to co-operate in a multinational team also by using virtual communication tools.

  Excellent

  The student is able to analyse the theoretical concepts of branding and apply them in the branding assignment in an excellent manner. He/she is able to develop different solutions for the brand challenge based on the research and assess different alternatives. The student is able to creatively apply the theoretical tools to develop a well reasoned brand strategy. The student takes a leading role in the international teamwork or part of it, can co-operate flexibly and constructively taking into account the cultural differences of the participants and thereby develop the group’s interaction.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Examples of literature related to the topic:
  Floor, K. 2006. Branding a Store. Amsterdam: BIS Publishers
  Finne S., Sivonen H. 2009. The Retail Value Chain
  Jansen. M.2006. Brand Prototyping
  Usunier, J. 2000. Marketing across cultures
  Edwards, H., Day, D.2005. Creating Passion Brands: How to build emotional brand connection with customers.
  Aaker D. Building strong brands

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Studying is mainly based on students’ team work around a business case, coached by the teachers from TAMK and the partner universities. The students work in in international teams with members from the partner universities. Coaching will be arranged in the class if possible.
  Regular virtual meetings and conferences are an essential part of the course.
  Individual essay about branding theories will be included.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Course evaluation comprises of the
  - Products (deliverables) 60%: completing the theoretical part (individual essay), research report, brand strategy report and presentation video. The presentation will be evaluated and graded also by the commissioner in a competition.
  - Process 40%: agreeing and documenting the team rules and meetings, active participation & communication in an international team including self, peer and teacher evaluation.
  Both part must be completed in an acceptable manner.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  02.02.2021 - 22.04.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 14.01.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Seats

  0 - 30

  Teacher(s)

  Tuula Andersson, Mari Helenius

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  4 cr

  Virtual proportion

  3 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Training and labour cooperation

  A Czech cosmetics company will give the students a branding challenge.

  Exam schedule

  No exam. The students should realize that it is very difficult to improve the final grade afterwards because the evaluation is based not only on the output of the project but also on the teamwork skills.

  International connections

  This course is executed in cooperation with TAMK Business Administration, Brno University of Technology in Czech Republic, Stenden University of Applied Sciences and Windesheim University of Applied Sciences in the Netherlands. Also, some students from a Belgian university will join this implementation.

  Students use of time and load

  Student time use 135 hours altogether. Generally there are 2 * 3 "class" hours per week. Part of the class hours (appr. 60 hours) will be reserved for working with the project and part of them for branding theory. However, students should notice that a great deal of the execution will be done outside class hours (135 - 60 = 75 hours)
  Week 11 will be an intensive week and the students should prepare themselves to work with this course also outside the regular class hours.

  Content periodicity

  Weeks 5 - 10 Branding theories, business case market analysis and consumer research.
  Week 11 Intensive week: business case brand strategy planning initiation
  Weeks 12 - 16 business case brand strategy building

•   International Business Path Studies TK00FJ33-3001 27.08.2020-31.07.2021  60 cr  (AVOINAMK) +-
  Course contents

  The studies consist of the first-year studies of the degree programme.
  
  There are two study places for open UAS students. The studies are conducted in English. After completing path studies you can apply to become a degree student. The application will take place in May and required studies have to be completed 31st of July.
  
  It is not possible to get student financial aid or other student benefits for the open UAS studies. Open University studies do not allow you to get residence permit in Finland. If you are a registered jobseeker at the Employment and Economic Development Office, make sure that you can participate in the studies before registering as a path student.
  
  Based on successful path study completion, you can apply for a degree programme through the path admission process through opintopolku.fi in early May 2021. To do this, you need to complete the required path studies and the required number of credits by July 31, 2021.

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  27.08.2020 - 31.07.2021

  Registration

  03.08.2020 - 05.08.2020

  Credits

  60 cr

  Group(s)

  AVOINAMK

  Seats

  0 - 6

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   International Business Project 3B00CX28-3003 02.09.2020-02.12.2020  5 cr  (18IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course describes the internationalization process of SMEs. Companies need versatile information in different stages of internationalization. Students will make a project for a case company. Students analyze international marketing environment and they learn how it affects company’s international marketing strategy. The course covers international entry modes and decisions related to international marketing mix.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Analyze international marketing environment of a target country.
  Describe the main entry modes in international trade.
  Apply the knowledge of the international marketplace to international marketing strategy.
  Analyze marketing mix decisions when entering to a new target country.
  Work effectively in a multicultural team.

  Course contents

  What are the special features of an international marketing environment?
  How does international environment affect company’s international marketing strategy?
  What are the main entry modes in international trade?
  What are the main product strategies when entering to a new target country?
  What are the factors affecting export pricing and promotional mix decisions in the international marketplace?

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  02.09.2020 - 02.12.2020

  Registration

  10.06.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  18IB

  Teacher(s)

  Juha Tuominen

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   International Practical Training 3B00CX23-3003 01.08.2020-31.12.2020  30 cr  (18IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Practical training will familiarize the students in a supervised manner with the practical work assignments of the field studied as well as application of knowledge and skills in working life. In the International Business programme, the Finnish students look for a practical training place abroad, while the foreign students seek for a job in Finland.
  
  The International Practical Training (5 months = 30 credits) must be a full-time position. The training can be done in no more than two parts. The shortest accepted full-time position can be of one month in length. Before starting the international practical training, the students will need to participate in a practical training orientation program, which will be arranged during the late autumn term of the second year. The student must contact the Practical Training Supervisor well in advance before the work placement and a written agreement on the practical training is required.
  
  After and during the practical training, the students will be able to:
  
  Learn the organizational culture of the employer and rules of the working life.
  Apply learned theory and skills with practice.
  Learn practicalities of the field studied.
  Be able to plan their career based on their practical training experience.
  Create networks with the employer and the working life.
  Collect ideas for the final thesis.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What does supervised practical training mean?
  What are the tasks of a BBA?
  How to act as a member of a work community?
  What are my strengths and ‘development areas’ in the working life?

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Guidelines for Practical Training are discussed during the Practical Training Orientation. Description of Practical Training can be found in IB Curriculum and more detailed guidelines in TAMK Intra, student's handbook.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Before starting the practical training the students will need to participate in a Practical Training Orientation which will be arranged during the autumn term of the second study year. The student must contact the Practical Training Supervisor at TAMK well in advance before signing the practical training agreement. A written agreement is always required. Students will have a supervisor both in the company and at TAMK during their practical training. Students are writing reports and weekly diaries during the practical training period.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  During the practical training the TAMK BBA students are building their knowledge and practical skills in the field of their chosen mandatory module of the TAMK BBA programme. Evaluation is based on practical training reports and final discussion after the practical training period -> pass.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 31.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 08.09.2020

  Credits

  30 cr

  Group(s)

  18IB

  Teacher(s)

  Marita Tuomala, Janne Hopeela

  Further information for students

  For more information please contact either:
  Marita Tuomala; marita.tuomala@tuni.fi or
  Janne Hopeela; janne.hopeela@tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  Pass/Fail

  Completion alternatives

  In case of accreditation of your previous work experience please contact either Ms. Tuomala or Mr. Hopeela

  Training and labour cooperation

  During the practical training period the students will learn the organizational culture of the employer and rules of the working life. Students will find the work placement themselves. Students are able to use TAMK's Y-Makers portal to find internships.

  Exam schedule

  No exam. Students are writing reports and weekly diaries during the practical training period

  International connections

  Finnish degree students are recommended to look for practical training positions abroad and foreign degree students either in Finland or abroad. We have some international connections; please contact your practical training supervisors.

  Students use of time and load

  The practical training is 30 ECTS which equals 5 months of full-time work (20 working weeks). The practical training can be done in no more than two parts.

  Content periodicity

  During the practical training period the students will learn the organizational culture of the employer and rules of the working life. The Practical Training Orientation will be arranged during the autumn term of the second study year. Usually the practical training will take place after the second study year and / or during the third study year.

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Pass - when all the required reports and a copy of the work certificate have been returned to the practical training supervisor and the feedback discussion has taken place between the student and the practical training supervisor at TAMK.

•   International Trade and Contracts 3B00DW01-3004 07.01.2021-07.03.2021  3 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to practices of international trade and to legal framework in international trade transactions. This course consists of two parts A. Practices of International Trade and B. Introduction to International Law and Contracts.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Describe the contents and requirements of international offers and invoices.
  • Define the terms of delivery (Incoterms) and know how to use them.
  • Explain and describe the main international payment methods and key documents in export process.
  • Explain how to use INTRASTAT-statistics and customs clearance in foreign trade.
  • Know the basic concepts of contract law and contract terms commonly used in international agreements.
  • Identify situations where CISG applies and what the basic obligations of a seller and a buyer are under CISG.
  • Know what a breach of contract means and the possible remedies for a breach of contract.
  • Know the differences between common dispute resolution mechanisms.

  Course contents

  • What are the contents and requirements of international offers and invoices?
  • How does one use international delivery terms - Incoterms in offers and contracts?
  • What are the main international payment methods and key documents in foreign trade?
  • What are INTRASTAT-statistics and customs clearance and when are they needed?
  • What are the main principles of contract law in international trade?
  • What is the scope of application of the CISG and what are the basic obligations of parties?
  • How can contractual disputes be resolved and what are the sanctions for breach of contract?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise, name and define basic concepts and terms in international trade and international contract law. The student can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work in individual and team assignments.

  Good

  The student is able to explain, compare and apply the terms and concepts in international trade and international contract law. The student can solve problems in case studies and assignments and justify his/her choice. The student takes responsibility and commits to group activities in addition to his/her own work.

  Excellent

  The student can apply the terms and concepts in international trade and international contract law extensively and is able to analyse and relate them to professional context. The student is able to assess diverse solution alternatives in case studies and assignments. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  ICC Guide to Export / Import - Global Business Standards and Strategies by Guillermo C. Jimenez. ICC Publications 2018. Fifth Edition.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  PART A / Tuomala: International Trade; Contact teaching in Zoom, exercises, assignments, exam in Moodle
  PART B / Poutala: International Contracts - starting week 6; Contact teaching in Zoom, materials and assignments in Moodle

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Grading scale 0 - 5. Total Grade: PART A. 70 % + PART B. 30 %

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.01.2021 - 07.03.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 14.01.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Marita Tuomala, Tero Poutala

  Further information for students

  Further information:
  Marita Tuomala
  marita.tuomala@tuni.fi
  tel. + 358 40 846 8057

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  3 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Training and labour cooperation

  None

  Exam schedule

  PART A: Exam dates will be informed later
  PART B. Exam dates will be informed later

  International connections

  None

  Students use of time and load

  3 ECTS = 80 hours student time usage
  PART A: 2 ECTS: About 20 hours lectures + 20 hours studying the course literature and materials + 10 hours making the L/C assignment and other assignments
  PART B: 1 ECTS: About 30 hours; lectures + assignments

  Content periodicity

  Part A: Practices of International trade; weeks 1 - 8
  Part B: International Law and Contracts; weeks 6 - 10
  The detailed course plan will be introduced during the first class.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student is not able to name or define the basic concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law. The student has failed in exam / exams and / or mandatory assignments.

  Satisfactory

  Student has limited knowledge of the basic concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in exam grades 1 - 2. The student is able to list, define and explain the basic concepts and terms in mandatory assignments.

  Good

  Student has good knowledge of the concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in exam grades 3 - 4. The student is able to use and apply the terms and concepts well in simple tasks and mandatory assignments.

  Excellent

  Student has excellent knowledge of the concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in an exam grade 5. The student masters the terms and concepts of the subject matter in an excellent manner and is able to apply and analyse the terms and concepts extensively in mandatory assignments and challenging case studies.

•   International Trade and Contracts 3B00DW01-3005 08.01.2021-07.03.2021  3 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to practices of international trade and to legal framework in international trade transactions. This course consists of two parts A. Practices of International Trade and B. Introduction to International Law and Contracts.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Describe the contents and requirements of international offers and invoices.
  • Define the terms of delivery (Incoterms) and know how to use them.
  • Explain and describe the main international payment methods and key documents in export process.
  • Explain how to use INTRASTAT-statistics and customs clearance in foreign trade.
  • Know the basic concepts of contract law and contract terms commonly used in international agreements.
  • Identify situations where CISG applies and what the basic obligations of a seller and a buyer are under CISG.
  • Know what a breach of contract means and the possible remedies for a breach of contract.
  • Know the differences between common dispute resolution mechanisms.

  Course contents

  • What are the contents and requirements of international offers and invoices?
  • How does one use international delivery terms - Incoterms in offers and contracts?
  • What are the main international payment methods and key documents in foreign trade?
  • What are INTRASTAT-statistics and customs clearance and when are they needed?
  • What are the main principles of contract law in international trade?
  • What is the scope of application of the CISG and what are the basic obligations of parties?
  • How can contractual disputes be resolved and what are the sanctions for breach of contract?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise, name and define basic concepts and terms in international trade and international contract law. The student can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work in individual and team assignments.

  Good

  The student is able to explain, compare and apply the terms and concepts in international trade and international contract law. The student can solve problems in case studies and assignments and justify his/her choice. The student takes responsibility and commits to group activities in addition to his/her own work.

  Excellent

  The student can apply the terms and concepts in international trade and international contract law extensively and is able to analyse and relate them to professional context. The student is able to assess diverse solution alternatives in case studies and assignments. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  ICC Guide to Export / Import - Global Business Standards and Strategies by Guillermo C. Jimenez. ICC Publications 2018. Fifth Edition.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  PART A / Tuomala: International Trade; Contact teaching in Zoom, exercises, assignments, exam in Moodle
  PART B / Poutala: International Contracts - starting week 6; Contact teaching in Zoom, materials and assignments in Moodle

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Grading scale 0 - 5. Total Grade: PART A. 70 % + PART B. 30 %

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.01.2021 - 07.03.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 14.01.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Marita Tuomala, Tero Poutala

  Further information for students

  Further information:
  Marita Tuomala
  marita.tuomala@tuni.fi
  tel. + 358 40 846 8057

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  3 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Training and labour cooperation

  None

  Exam schedule

  PART A: Exam dates will be informed later
  PART B. Exam dates will be informed later

  International connections

  None

  Students use of time and load

  3 ECTS = 80 hours student time usage
  PART A: 2 ECTS: About 20 hours lectures + 20 hours studying the course literature and materials + 10 hours making the L/C assignment and other assignments
  PART B: 1 ECTS: About 30 hours; lectures + assignments

  Content periodicity

  Part A: Practices of International trade; weeks 1 - 8
  Part B: International Law and Contracts; weeks 6 - 10
  The detailed course plan will be introduced during the first class.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student is not able to name or define the basic concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law. The student has failed in exam / exams and / or mandatory assignments.

  Satisfactory

  Student has limited knowledge of the basic concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in exam grades 1 - 2. The student is able to list, define and explain the basic concepts and terms in mandatory assignments.

  Good

  Student has good knowledge of the concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in exam grades 3 - 4. The student is able to use and apply the terms and concepts well in simple tasks and mandatory assignments.

  Excellent

  Student has excellent knowledge of the concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in an exam grade 5. The student masters the terms and concepts of the subject matter in an excellent manner and is able to apply and analyse the terms and concepts extensively in mandatory assignments and challenging case studies.

•   Introduction to Accounting 3B00DV85-3003 01.08.2020-18.10.2020  2 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course, ABC of accounting, introduces the fundamentals of company accounting principles and practices. The perspective is practical, including both financial and management accounting themes.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • understand the role and relevancy of finance function within a company
  • understand relevant finance and accounting terminology
  • utilize key finance and accounting elements of a company

  Course contents

  • What are Profit & Loss, Balance sheet and Cash Flow?
  • What are financial and management accounting about?
  • What is double entry bookkeeping system?
  • How to evaluate business financials?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognizes the role of accounting in a company and relevant accounting principles and practices. The student can name the most relevant topics in financial accounting and sees the purpose of operating a business. The student identifies the principles of bookkeeping and financial statements and can make basic bookkeeping postings. He/she recognizes the key principles of Finnish business taxation and legal obligations. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility as an individual learner, and act as part of a team.

  Good

  The student is able to structure the connection between profitability, balance sheet and cash flow. The student can apply the principles of double entry postings and name the phases of year end close. The student is able to apply calculations for VAT, payroll and other obligations; he/she can make simple year end closings based on financial accounting process. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback and develop his/her interaction skills, adding value to the team.

  Excellent

  The student adapts the course themes at advanced level. He/she expands the context with curiosity and analyses the course themes actively. The student finds the path towards academic approach and uses relevant information sources. The student is able to evaluate and assess financial accounting processes and build creative solutions by combining the course themes. The student pays needed attention to detail in cases, looks for alternative perspectives. The student uses feedback to iterate the learning process. The student is able to develop creative and constructive working methods and bring professional commitment throughout the course.

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 30.09.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Introduction to Accounting 3B00DV85-3004 01.08.2020-18.10.2020  2 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course, ABC of accounting, introduces the fundamentals of company accounting principles and practices. The perspective is practical, including both financial and management accounting themes.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • understand the role and relevancy of finance function within a company
  • understand relevant finance and accounting terminology
  • utilize key finance and accounting elements of a company

  Course contents

  • What are Profit & Loss, Balance sheet and Cash Flow?
  • What are financial and management accounting about?
  • What is double entry bookkeeping system?
  • How to evaluate business financials?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognizes the role of accounting in a company and relevant accounting principles and practices. The student can name the most relevant topics in financial accounting and sees the purpose of operating a business. The student identifies the principles of bookkeeping and financial statements and can make basic bookkeeping postings. He/she recognizes the key principles of Finnish business taxation and legal obligations. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility as an individual learner, and act as part of a team.

  Good

  The student is able to structure the connection between profitability, balance sheet and cash flow. The student can apply the principles of double entry postings and name the phases of year end close. The student is able to apply calculations for VAT, payroll and other obligations; he/she can make simple year end closings based on financial accounting process. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback and develop his/her interaction skills, adding value to the team.

  Excellent

  The student adapts the course themes at advanced level. He/she expands the context with curiosity and analyses the course themes actively. The student finds the path towards academic approach and uses relevant information sources. The student is able to evaluate and assess financial accounting processes and build creative solutions by combining the course themes. The student pays needed attention to detail in cases, looks for alternative perspectives. The student uses feedback to iterate the learning process. The student is able to develop creative and constructive working methods and bring professional commitment throughout the course.

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 30.09.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Introduction to Business Operations and Legal Aspects 3B00DV83-3003 01.08.2020-18.10.2020  3 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to company processes and functions in a modern business environment. The aim is to cover the essentials for business operations and introduce the key legal aspects of setting up a business in Finland and choosing a company legal type. The students will learn to search for and apply professionally significant legal information.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • have a good insight into functions of modern business environment.
  • adopt the principles of business profitability, liquidity and solvency.
  • analyze the interdependence of various business variables.
  • indentify and use the key sources of Finnish law
  • describe the type of enterprise and their key differences
  • understand the procedures required to establish a company
  • draw up documents for the formation and registration of a company

  Course contents

  • What is a company and business operations?
  • How to evaluate and measure the success of a business?
  • What is organisational structure and its functions?
  • What are the key sources of law and how to utilize them?
  • Who has the right to trade in Finland
  • What legal considerations are relevant to setting up a business?
  • What are the key differences between the company legal forms?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with simple isolated examples. Work is poorly structured and there is no relationship to other ideas, concepts or previous knowledge. The student struggles to assess the impact of business activities on the business or society in general. The student recognizes the key sources of law and is able to define company legal forms.

  Good

  The student demonstrates sound understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with multiple relevant examples. He/she can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world and offer reasonable solutions. Work is mostly logical and well-structured, with some inconsistencies or minor errors. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and its immediate surrounding, mostly in the short-term. He/she can apply the key sources of law and is able to explain differences between company legal forms.

  Excellent

  The student demonstrates deep understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with authentic, connected examples. The student can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world, analyse underlying problems and synthesise solutions out of available alternatives. Work is logical and well-structured, and ideas are clearly expressed. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and the society in general, both in the short- and long-term, and demonstrates commitment to sustainable development. The student is able to apply different sources of law extensively and analyse and assess different company forms in a professional manner.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Business Operations:
  • Online resources and materials in Moodle
  Legal Aspects (required reading):
  • Surakka, Aapo. (2012). Access to Finnish law. Talentum Media. Pages 16–25 and 88–102.
  Available in digital form in TAMK-Finna Alma Talent Verkkokirjahylly.
  • Items covered in class, and
  • Materials in Tabula

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online lessons, group work, self-study

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Introduction to Business Operations (2 cr):
  - Individual exam (70%)
  - Active participation in online discussions and group work (30%)
  Legal Aspects (1 cr):
  - Individual exam (70%)
  - Active participation and group work in class and on-line (30%)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Jarmo Koivuniemi, Elena Grigorova, Tero Poutala, Tero Poutala

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Exam schedule

  Business Operations:
  Online written exam - 07.10.2020 08.00 - 11.00 (link in Moodle)
  Re-take dates and times to be announced later.

  Students use of time and load

  Online teaching 6 x 3h, independent study 63h

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with simple isolated examples. Work is poorly structured and there is no relationship to other ideas, concepts or previous knowledge. The student struggles to assess the impact of business activities on the business or society in general. The student recognizes the key sources of law and is able to define company legal forms.

  Good

  The student demonstrates sound understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with multiple relevant examples. He/she can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world and offer reasonable solutions. Work is mostly logical and well-structured, with some inconsistencies or minor errors. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and its immediate surrounding, mostly in the short-term. He/she can apply the key sources of law and is able to explain differences between company legal forms.

  Excellent

  The student demonstrates deep understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with authentic, connected examples. The student can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world, analyse underlying problems and synthesise solutions out of available alternatives. Work is logical and well-structured, and ideas are clearly expressed. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and the society in general, both in the short- and long-term, and demonstrates commitment to sustainable development. The student is able to apply different sources of law extensively and analyse and assess different company forms in a professional manner.

•   Introduction to Business Operations and Legal Aspects 3B00DV83-3004 01.08.2020-18.10.2020  3 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to company processes and functions in a modern business environment. The aim is to cover the essentials for business operations and introduce the key legal aspects of setting up a business in Finland and choosing a company legal type. The students will learn to search for and apply professionally significant legal information.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • have a good insight into functions of modern business environment.
  • adopt the principles of business profitability, liquidity and solvency.
  • analyze the interdependence of various business variables.
  • indentify and use the key sources of Finnish law
  • describe the type of enterprise and their key differences
  • understand the procedures required to establish a company
  • draw up documents for the formation and registration of a company

  Course contents

  • What is a company and business operations?
  • How to evaluate and measure the success of a business?
  • What is organisational structure and its functions?
  • What are the key sources of law and how to utilize them?
  • Who has the right to trade in Finland
  • What legal considerations are relevant to setting up a business?
  • What are the key differences between the company legal forms?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with simple isolated examples. Work is poorly structured and there is no relationship to other ideas, concepts or previous knowledge. The student struggles to assess the impact of business activities on the business or society in general. The student recognizes the key sources of law and is able to define company legal forms.

  Good

  The student demonstrates sound understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with multiple relevant examples. He/she can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world and offer reasonable solutions. Work is mostly logical and well-structured, with some inconsistencies or minor errors. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and its immediate surrounding, mostly in the short-term. He/she can apply the key sources of law and is able to explain differences between company legal forms.

  Excellent

  The student demonstrates deep understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with authentic, connected examples. The student can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world, analyse underlying problems and synthesise solutions out of available alternatives. Work is logical and well-structured, and ideas are clearly expressed. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and the society in general, both in the short- and long-term, and demonstrates commitment to sustainable development. The student is able to apply different sources of law extensively and analyse and assess different company forms in a professional manner.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Business Operations:
  • Online resources and materials in Moodle
  Legal Aspects (required reading):
  • Surakka, Aapo. (2012). Access to Finnish law. Talentum Media. Pages 16–25 and 88–102.
  Available in digital form in TAMK-Finna Alma Talent Verkkokirjahylly.
  • Items covered in class, and
  • Materials in Tabula

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online lessons, group work, self-study

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Introduction to Business Operations (2 cr):
  - Individual exam (70%)
  - Active participation in online discussions and group work (30%)
  Legal Aspects (1 cr):
  - Individual exam (70%)
  - Active participation and group work in class and on-line (30%)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Jarmo Koivuniemi, Elena Grigorova, Tero Poutala, Tero Poutala

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Exam schedule

  Business Operations:
  Online written exam - 07.10.2020 08.00 - 11.00 (link in Moodle)
  Re-take dates and times to be announced later.

  Students use of time and load

  Online teaching 6 x 3h, independent study 63h

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with simple isolated examples. Work is poorly structured and there is no relationship to other ideas, concepts or previous knowledge. The student struggles to assess the impact of business activities on the business or society in general. The student recognizes the key sources of law and is able to define company legal forms.

  Good

  The student demonstrates sound understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with multiple relevant examples. He/she can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world and offer reasonable solutions. Work is mostly logical and well-structured, with some inconsistencies or minor errors. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and its immediate surrounding, mostly in the short-term. He/she can apply the key sources of law and is able to explain differences between company legal forms.

  Excellent

  The student demonstrates deep understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with authentic, connected examples. The student can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world, analyse underlying problems and synthesise solutions out of available alternatives. Work is logical and well-structured, and ideas are clearly expressed. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and the society in general, both in the short- and long-term, and demonstrates commitment to sustainable development. The student is able to apply different sources of law extensively and analyse and assess different company forms in a professional manner.

•   Introduction to Experience Economy 3B00DV87-3003 01.08.2020-18.10.2020  2 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Selling goods and services is not enough in modern economy. There is a need to consider the extra value of business supply by designing holistic, multisensory experiences for customers. Tourism is a typical business sector to implement experience economy characteristics and benefit from it.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand and identify the nature and the characteristics of experience economy.
  • Comprehend the characteristics of tourism business
  • Apply theories of experience economy, tourist motivational factors and tourist typology in business planning

  Course contents

  • What is experience economy about and how can we recognize it in modern world?
  • What kind of a phenomenon is tourism and what are the main types of tourism business?
  • How to apply the characteristics of tourism phenomenon in business planning?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and define the basic concepts of the experience economy in the context of tourism. The student is able to discuss and consider some characteristics of the experience economy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility on his/her own work.

  Good

  The student is able to explain, compare and apply the theories of the experience economy and tourism. The student can make plans, solve problems, and choose an appropriate course of action. The student can take responsibility and commit to the group activities in addition to his/her own work.

  Excellent

  The student can generalise and analyse extensive entities and relations between the concepts and theories of the experience economy. The student can search for diverse courses of action and solution alternatives and assess these alternatives. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Matala

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Introduction to Experience Economy 3B00DV87-3004 01.08.2020-18.10.2020  2 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Selling goods and services is not enough in modern economy. There is a need to consider the extra value of business supply by designing holistic, multisensory experiences for customers. Tourism is a typical business sector to implement experience economy characteristics and benefit from it.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand and identify the nature and the characteristics of experience economy.
  • Comprehend the characteristics of tourism business
  • Apply theories of experience economy, tourist motivational factors and tourist typology in business planning

  Course contents

  • What is experience economy about and how can we recognize it in modern world?
  • What kind of a phenomenon is tourism and what are the main types of tourism business?
  • How to apply the characteristics of tourism phenomenon in business planning?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and define the basic concepts of the experience economy in the context of tourism. The student is able to discuss and consider some characteristics of the experience economy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility on his/her own work.

  Good

  The student is able to explain, compare and apply the theories of the experience economy and tourism. The student can make plans, solve problems, and choose an appropriate course of action. The student can take responsibility and commit to the group activities in addition to his/her own work.

  Excellent

  The student can generalise and analyse extensive entities and relations between the concepts and theories of the experience economy. The student can search for diverse courses of action and solution alternatives and assess these alternatives. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Matala

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Introduction to Marketing 1 3B00DV81-3003 25.08.2020-01.10.2020  2 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to modern business marketing. It introduces basic marketing concepts, theories and language with a focus of understanding the role and the needs of the customer in consumer business and business-to-business marketing.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Demonstrate knowledge about the significance and role of marketing
  in business management.
  • Describe the value creation process for customers by understanding
  customer needs.
  • Demonstrate knowledge of modern marketing mix in theory and
  practice.
  • Write a marketing plan for their business.

  Course contents

  • What is marketing and what do marketers do?
  • How to create customer value and experience?
  • How to analyse marketing environment and collect marketing information?
  • What are products, services and brands?
  • How to do pricing?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and name the basic concepts of marketing. He/she can use the basic terms in a correct way and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted, and work in a team and take responsibility of his/her own work.

  Good

  The student is able to make a marketing plan accordingly. The student can select the most appropriate course of action from diverse options and justify his/her choice. The student has participated in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/hers knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands extensively the concepts and principles of marketing. The student is able to conduct a fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student combines different solution alternatives creatively or creates new ones. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student cooperates responsibly, flexibly and constructively.

  ---

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will be delivered online using Tuni Moodle. Live sessions will be held via Zoom. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  25.08.2020 - 01.10.2020

  Registration

  10.06.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Annikka Lepola, Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Introduction to Marketing 1 3B00DV81-3004 25.08.2020-29.09.2020  2 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to modern business marketing. It introduces basic marketing concepts, theories and language with a focus of understanding the role and the needs of the customer in consumer business and business-to-business marketing.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Demonstrate knowledge about the significance and role of marketing
  in business management.
  • Describe the value creation process for customers by understanding
  customer needs.
  • Demonstrate knowledge of modern marketing mix in theory and
  practice.
  • Write a marketing plan for their business.

  Course contents

  • What is marketing and what do marketers do?
  • How to create customer value and experience?
  • How to analyse marketing environment and collect marketing information?
  • What are products, services and brands?
  • How to do pricing?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and name the basic concepts of marketing. He/she can use the basic terms in a correct way and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted, and work in a team and take responsibility of his/her own work.

  Good

  The student is able to make a marketing plan accordingly. The student can select the most appropriate course of action from diverse options and justify his/her choice. The student has participated in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/hers knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands extensively the concepts and principles of marketing. The student is able to conduct a fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student combines different solution alternatives creatively or creates new ones. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student cooperates responsibly, flexibly and constructively.

  ---

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will be delivered online using Tuni Moodle. Live sessions will be held via Zoom. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  25.08.2020 - 29.09.2020

  Registration

  10.06.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Annikka Lepola, Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Introduction to Marketing 2 3B00DV89-3003 20.10.2020-17.11.2020  2 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to modern business marketing. It introduces basic marketing concepts, theories and language with a focus of understanding the role and the needs of the customer in consumer business and business-to-business marketing.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Demonstrate knowledge about the significance and role of marketing
  in business management.
  • Describe the value creation process for customers by understanding
  customer needs.
  • Demonstrate knowledge of modern marketing mix in theory and
  practice.
  • Write a marketing plan.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing 1

  Course contents

  • What is modern multichannel marketing?
  • What are examples of doing advertising, PR; personal selling and sales
  promotion?
  • How to do direct, online, social media and mobile marketing?
  • What is sustainable marketing?
  • How to write a marketing plan for a business and create website contents?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and define the basics of modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix. He/she can use the basic terms and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted. The student takes responsibility of his/her own work and can work in a group.

  Good

  The student applies modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix in marketing planning accordingly and solves the problems associated with it. The student participates in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the outcome with his/her knowledge. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands the concepts and principles of marketing extensively. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. He/she assesses diverse solution alternatives in marketing planning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner.

  ---

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will be delivered online using Tuni Moodle. Live sessions will be held via Zoom. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  20.10.2020 - 17.11.2020

  Registration

  16.09.2020 - 15.10.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Introduction to Marketing 2 3B00DV89-3004 20.10.2020-17.11.2020  2 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to modern business marketing. It introduces basic marketing concepts, theories and language with a focus of understanding the role and the needs of the customer in consumer business and business-to-business marketing.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Demonstrate knowledge about the significance and role of marketing
  in business management.
  • Describe the value creation process for customers by understanding
  customer needs.
  • Demonstrate knowledge of modern marketing mix in theory and
  practice.
  • Write a marketing plan.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing 1

  Course contents

  • What is modern multichannel marketing?
  • What are examples of doing advertising, PR; personal selling and sales
  promotion?
  • How to do direct, online, social media and mobile marketing?
  • What is sustainable marketing?
  • How to write a marketing plan for a business and create website contents?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and define the basics of modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix. He/she can use the basic terms and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted. The student takes responsibility of his/her own work and can work in a group.

  Good

  The student applies modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix in marketing planning accordingly and solves the problems associated with it. The student participates in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the outcome with his/her knowledge. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands the concepts and principles of marketing extensively. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. He/she assesses diverse solution alternatives in marketing planning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner.

  ---

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will be delivered online using Tuni Moodle. Live sessions will be held via Zoom. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  20.10.2020 - 17.11.2020

  Registration

  16.09.2020 - 15.10.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Introduction to Supply Chain Management 3B00DW05-3006 18.01.2021-26.02.2021  3 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course introduces the basics of Logistics and Supply Chain Management operations. The course will focus on the business and humanitarian (emergency) sides of SCM. The students will learn the basics of procurement, inventory, warehousing and transportation processes, with full integration using ERP systems such as SAP AIl in One and Business One.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Describe the basic concepts and principles of logistics
  • Manage the logistics process in a company using ERP systems transaction such as sales orders, purchase orders, order fulfilment, product issues and inventory control.

  Course contents

  • What is Logistics and Supply Chain Management?
  • How SCM works in services, industrial and humanitarian sectors?
  • How to make and simulate real business activities in SAP?
  • How SAP works and manages the business integration?
  • What are the logistics costs and how to create value added services in SCM?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in supply chain management. The student has basic understanding of logistics in general and how it is connected to organisation's most common processes. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations regarding SCM. The student demonstrates basic skills by submitting required tasks and assignments during the course.

  Good

  The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in (emergency) supply chain. The student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant working life SCM related situations. The student contributes according to teacher's expectations to tasks and assignments during the course.

  Excellent

  The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in (emergency) supply chain. The student has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course. The student is also able to collect information from various nodes of SC and use the extracted information in SC planning, development and management, while streamlining it with proper managerial SCM-tools. The student can also use the acquired information as a basis for new, added value containing data creation. The student is able to capitalise on knowledge in the execution of organisation's daily SCM related processes.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped class sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Assigned tasks, report, exam, and participation will be evaluated.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  18.01.2021 - 26.02.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 05.01.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Knowledge gained from the course can be applied to various roles along the supply chain's functions.

  Exam schedule

  Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

  International connections

  Multiple global case studies will be used in the course

  Students use of time and load

  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Complete the final report and exam
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Themes for the course:
  - Supply chain management- the big picture
  - Service supply chains, strategy and processes
  - Logistics
  - Humanitarian supply chain management and logistics
  - Lean, JIT
  - Risks and risk management

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in supply chain management. The student has basic understanding of logistics in general and how it is connected to organisation's most common processes. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations regarding SCM. The student demonstrates basic skills by submitting required tasks and assignments during the course.

  Good

  The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in (emergency) supply chain. The student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant working life SCM related situations. The student contributes according to teacher's expectations to tasks and assignments during the course.

  Excellent

  The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in (emergency) supply chain. The student has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course. The student is also able to collect information from various nodes of SC and use the extracted information in SC planning, development and management, while streamlining it with proper managerial SCM-tools. The student can also use the acquired information as a basis for new, added value containing data creation. The student is able to capitalise on knowledge in the execution of organisation's daily SCM related processes.

•   Introduction to Supply Chain Management 3B00DW05-3007 18.01.2021-26.02.2021  3 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course introduces the basics of Logistics and Supply Chain Management operations. The course will focus on the business and humanitarian (emergency) sides of SCM. The students will learn the basics of procurement, inventory, warehousing and transportation processes, with full integration using ERP systems such as SAP AIl in One and Business One.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Describe the basic concepts and principles of logistics
  • Manage the logistics process in a company using ERP systems transaction such as sales orders, purchase orders, order fulfilment, product issues and inventory control.

  Course contents

  • What is Logistics and Supply Chain Management?
  • How SCM works in services, industrial and humanitarian sectors?
  • How to make and simulate real business activities in SAP?
  • How SAP works and manages the business integration?
  • What are the logistics costs and how to create value added services in SCM?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in supply chain management. The student has basic understanding of logistics in general and how it is connected to organisation's most common processes. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations regarding SCM. The student demonstrates basic skills by submitting required tasks and assignments during the course.

  Good

  The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in (emergency) supply chain. The student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant working life SCM related situations. The student contributes according to teacher's expectations to tasks and assignments during the course.

  Excellent

  The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in (emergency) supply chain. The student has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course. The student is also able to collect information from various nodes of SC and use the extracted information in SC planning, development and management, while streamlining it with proper managerial SCM-tools. The student can also use the acquired information as a basis for new, added value containing data creation. The student is able to capitalise on knowledge in the execution of organisation's daily SCM related processes.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped class sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learnin

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Assigned tasks, report, exam, and participation will be evaluated.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  18.01.2021 - 26.02.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 05.01.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Knowledge gained from the course can be applied to various roles along the supply chain's functions.

  Exam schedule

  Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

  International connections

  Multiple global case studies will be used in the course

  Students use of time and load

  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Complete the final report and exam
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Themes for the course:
  - Supply chain management- the big picture
  - Service supply chains, strategy and processes
  - Logistics
  - Humanitarian supply chain management and logistics
  - Lean, JIT
  - Risks and risk management

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in supply chain management. The student has basic understanding of logistics in general and how it is connected to organisation's most common processes. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations regarding SCM. The student demonstrates basic skills by submitting required tasks and assignments during the course.

  Good

  The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in (emergency) supply chain. The student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant working life SCM related situations. The student contributes according to teacher's expectations to tasks and assignments during the course.

  Excellent

  The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in (emergency) supply chain. The student has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course. The student is also able to collect information from various nodes of SC and use the extracted information in SC planning, development and management, while streamlining it with proper managerial SCM-tools. The student can also use the acquired information as a basis for new, added value containing data creation. The student is able to capitalise on knowledge in the execution of organisation's daily SCM related processes.

•   Lean Business Modeling 3B00DW73-3001 01.01.2021-14.05.2021  8 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  In this course students will learn business modeling in practise by using different kind of business modeling tools. They will create their first business model and try to find right Product Market Fit for their Products and Services.
  
  After completing the course the student will be able to
  - develop innovative business model by using different kind of tools, like Business Model Canvas, Lean Canvas, Value Proposition Canvas, Empathy Map etc.)
  - search different kind of relevant information from different sources
  - utilize network of experts in the development of the idea

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Course content
  - How to use development tools for business modeling?
  - How to develop business by finding useful information from different kind of sources?
  - How to create useful networks?
  - How to lead networks?

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Pass:
  
  The student applies different business modelling tools in a structured manner. He/she can compare different business modelling tools and choose a tool according to the desired outcome. The student applies business modelling theory to solve upcoming problems. He/she is able to consider and assess things both from his/her and the close community's viewpoint.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Book list in Teams

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Team learning

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Team evaluation (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2021 - 14.05.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 14.01.2021

  Credits

  8 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Mari Helenius

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  No exams (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  35 hours / week (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Good

  Pass:
  The student applies different business modelling tools in a structured manner. He/she can compare different business modelling tools and choose a tool accordingly to the desired outcome. The student applies business modelling theory to solve upcoming problems. He/she is able to consider and assess things both from his/her and the close community's viewpoint. (not translated)

•   Liikeviestintä 3B00DW81-3001 01.08.2020-26.11.2020  2 cr  (19IBB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Kurssi on tarkoitettu IB:n suomenkielisille opiskelijoille. Kurssilla perehdytään asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteisiin ja harjoitellaan kirjoittamaan työ- ja liike-elämän kirjallisia viestejä, kuten liikekirjeitä ja muistioita. Kurssilla kerrataan ja harjoitellaan myös suomen kielen oikeinkirjoitusta.
  
  Kurssin suoritettuaan, opiskelija:
  
  Osoittaa perehtyneisyyttä asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteisiin.
  Osaa käyttää ja soveltaa asiakirjastandardia alansa tyypillisissä kirjoitteissa.
  Osaa viestiä asiatyylisesti ja vakuuttavasti ottaen huomioon vastaanottajan, tilanteen ja alan käytänteet.
  Ymmärtää oikeakielisyyden merkityksen osana viestinnällistä ammattitaitoaan ja yrityksen imagoa.
  Osaa arvioida ja kehittää viestintäosaamistaan.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Mitkä ovat asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteet?
  Millainen on asiakirjastandardin rakenne ja mitä hyötyä sen hallitsemisesta on?
  Miten laaditaan työ- ja liike-elämän yleisimmät kirjoitteet?
  Mikä on kielenhuollon merkitys työelämässä?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can write business documents and messages according to given instructions and examples. He/she communicates understandably in different situations of his/her own field. The student is able to make good use of the means of communication.

  Good

  The student communicates fluently, understandably and interestingly in different situations of business life. He/she takes the receiver and situation into account in his/her communication. The student can interpret receiver’s action and respond to it by building collaboration e.g. in customer service situations.

  Excellent

  The student communicates in different situations of business life creatively and with great expertise. He/she is able to use the means of communication in many different ways and is able to influence by using language. The student can adjust his/her communication according to the receiver, situation, circumstances (e.g. online communication) and feedback. He/she takes his/her organisation’s values and visions into account in his/her communication.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Verkkomateriaali Moodlessa. (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Etäopetus. Opetuskeskustelut, käytännön harjoitukset sekä kirjalliset ja suulliset tehtävät. (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Opintojakson arvosana muodostuu kahdesta arvioitavasta tehtävästä. Saadakseen kurssista arvosanan opiskelijan tulee lisäksi tehdä vaaditut kotitehtävät sekä osallistua opetukseen. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 26.11.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  19IBB

  19IB

  19IB1

  19IB2

  19IB6

  19IB7

  19IB8

  19IBA

  19IB3

  19IB4

  19IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Mari Touronen

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Exam schedule

  Opintojaksosta ei järjestetä tenttiä, vaan arvosana muodostuu annettujen tehtävien arvioinneista. (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  Opetusta yhteensä 14 h sijoittuen 1.- 2. periodiin. Kotitehtäviä opetuskertojen välillä ja kaksi laajempaa arvioitavaa tehtävää. (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can write business documents and messages according to given instructions and examples. He/she communicates understandably in different situations of his/her own field. The student is able to make good use of the means of communication.

  Good

  The student communicates fluently, understandably and interestingly in different situations of business life. He/she takes the receiver and situation into account in his/her communication. The student can interpret receiver’s action and respond to it by building collaboration e.g. in customer service situations.

  Excellent

  The student communicates in different situations of business life creatively and with great expertise. He/she is able to use the means of communication in many different ways and is able to influence by using language. The student can adjust his/her communication according to the receiver, situation, circumstances (e.g. online communication) and feedback. He/she takes his/her organisation’s values and visions into account in his/her communication.

•   Liikeviestintä 3B00DW81-3003 01.01.2021-30.06.2021  2 cr  (19IBB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Kurssi on tarkoitettu IB:n suomenkielisille opiskelijoille. Kurssilla perehdytään asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteisiin ja harjoitellaan kirjoittamaan työ- ja liike-elämän kirjallisia viestejä, kuten liikekirjeitä ja muistioita. Kurssilla kerrataan ja harjoitellaan myös suomen kielen oikeinkirjoitusta.
  
  Kurssin suoritettuaan, opiskelija:
  
  Osoittaa perehtyneisyyttä asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteisiin.
  Osaa käyttää ja soveltaa asiakirjastandardia alansa tyypillisissä kirjoitteissa.
  Osaa viestiä asiatyylisesti ja vakuuttavasti ottaen huomioon vastaanottajan, tilanteen ja alan käytänteet.
  Ymmärtää oikeakielisyyden merkityksen osana viestinnällistä ammattitaitoaan ja yrityksen imagoa.
  Osaa arvioida ja kehittää viestintäosaamistaan.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Mitkä ovat asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteet?
  Millainen on asiakirjastandardin rakenne ja mitä hyötyä sen hallitsemisesta on?
  Miten laaditaan työ- ja liike-elämän yleisimmät kirjoitteet?
  Mikä on kielenhuollon merkitys työelämässä?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can write business documents and messages according to given instructions and examples. He/she communicates understandably in different situations of his/her own field. The student is able to make good use of the means of communication.

  Good

  The student communicates fluently, understandably and interestingly in different situations of business life. He/she takes the receiver and situation into account in his/her communication. The student can interpret receiver’s action and respond to it by building collaboration e.g. in customer service situations.

  Excellent

  The student communicates in different situations of business life creatively and with great expertise. He/she is able to use the means of communication in many different ways and is able to influence by using language. The student can adjust his/her communication according to the receiver, situation, circumstances (e.g. online communication) and feedback. He/she takes his/her organisation’s values and visions into account in his/her communication.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Verkkomateriaali Moodlessa. (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Etäopetus. Opetuskeskustelut, käytännön harjoitukset sekä kirjalliset ja suulliset tehtävät. (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Opintojakson arvosana muodostuu kahdesta arvioitavasta tehtävästä. Saadakseen kurssista arvosanan opiskelijan tulee lisäksi tehdä vaaditut kotitehtävät sekä osallistua opetukseen. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2021 - 30.06.2021

  Registration

  12.01.2021 - 31.01.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  19IBB

  19IB

  19IB1

  19IB2

  19IB6

  19IB7

  19IB8

  19IBA

  19IB3

  19IB4

  19IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Mari Touronen

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Exam schedule

  Opintojaksosta ei järjestetä tenttiä, vaan arvosana muodostuu annettujen tehtävien arvioinneista. (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  Opetusta yhteensä 14 h sijoittuen 3.- 4. periodiin. Kotitehtäviä opetuskertojen välillä ja kaksi laajempaa arvioitavaa tehtävää. (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can write business documents and messages according to given instructions and examples. He/she communicates understandably in different situations of his/her own field. The student is able to make good use of the means of communication.

  Good

  The student communicates fluently, understandably and interestingly in different situations of business life. He/she takes the receiver and situation into account in his/her communication. The student can interpret receiver’s action and respond to it by building collaboration e.g. in customer service situations.

  Excellent

  The student communicates in different situations of business life creatively and with great expertise. He/she is able to use the means of communication in many different ways and is able to influence by using language. The student can adjust his/her communication according to the receiver, situation, circumstances (e.g. online communication) and feedback. He/she takes his/her organisation’s values and visions into account in his/her communication.

•   Literature Essays 3B00CX30-3005 01.08.2020-31.12.2020  2 cr  (18IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The study of literature is distinct because it requires the perspective and the skills of critical reading and analyzing. The literature essay requires personal interpretation and clear expression of ideas.
  
  The student will independently familiarise himself/herself with literature in his/her interest fields (for example entrepreneurship, management, communality, innovation or marketing) and write an essay on the book.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  Critically read and analyse literature
  Formulate a coherent summary from the literature (argument, essay)
  Build own interpretations from literature
  Act ethically when citing or referring to text written by another author

  Course contents

  What are the main topics and central concerns of the literature review?
  What are the critical points of the topic?
  How to present a reasoned argument?
  How to present a coherent essay about the topic?

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 31.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.12.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  18IB

  Teacher(s)

  Matti Karlsson

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Managing Multicultural Organizations 3B00DW41-3001 19.10.2020-08.12.2020  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Culture is an integral part of everyday organizational life. Understanding culture facilitates organizational success in national- as well as international market. The course is designed to deal with culture and its impact in managing/leading organization made up of people from diverse cultural background.
  
  
  After completing of the course, students will be able to:
  
  Know culture from different points of view prioritizing the field of management and organization.
  
  Lead multicultural workforce
  
  Build work team/group with people from different cultural background
  
  Deal with cultural differences effectively
  
  Identify culture lenient motivational strategy
  
  Manage cultural tension by engaging empathetic approach
  
  Negotiate globally

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  First year BBA studies or equivalent studies for the exchange students

  Course contents

  What is culture?
  
  What is family-, national-, organizational- and business culture?
  
  What are the roots of culture?
  
  How culture influences management and the functioning of an organization?
  
  How to deal with cultural challenges in forming group/team and leading people with diverse cultural background?
  
  What are the crucial issues to remember while negotiating internationally?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can define culture and recognises cultural differences. He/she is aware of the course load and able to do routine tasks. The student can give and receive feedback and can do project work in a group. He/she considers and assesses things from his/her viewpoints. The student can work in a group. He/she judges things mainly from his/her own perspective.

  Good

  The student compares culture and explains its impact on different social entities. He/she helps to apply cultural approach in leading a multicultural workforce. The student as a resource person assists in solving problems in leading a multicultural workforce or building a multicultural team. He/she helps making a plan for dealing with cultural differences effectively. He/she considers and assesses issues from multicultural perspectives and can engage in negotiation with counterparts from another culture. The student becomes a responsible member of a diverse group.

  Excellent

  The student understands culture from multiple perspectives and analyses its impact on different social entities including business organisations. The student as a resource person acts independently or as part of a group in leading a multicultural workforce or building a multicultural team. He/she assists in finding solutions to team in dealing with cultural differences effectively. He/she actively engages himself/herself in the work group in finding solutions to problems at hand or adopting policy regarding a culture lenient motivational plan. Moreover, the student can play a flexible role in multicultural negotiation context.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Cultures and organizations : software of the mind : intercultural cooperation and its importance for survival, Hofstede, Geert, 2010 (suggested chapters)
  +
  Lecture handouts

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact + online teaching|study conversation|individual task|project|presentation

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Project: 30%
  Presentation: 10%
  Presentation diary: 10%
  Individual task: 50%

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  19.10.2020 - 08.12.2020

  Registration

  21.08.2020 - 08.10.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Seats

  30 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Elena Grigorova, Shaidul Kazi

  Further information for students

  Contact/-online lessons are very important from the learning point of view

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Talk to the course teacher

  Training and labour cooperation

  Possible & welcome

  Exam schedule

  No test but project, individual task & presentation

  International connections

  Open

  Students use of time and load

  Total time: 27x5 = 135 hours
  Contact lesson 7: 21 hours
  Project: 25 hours
  Reading: 29 hours
  Individual task & article note: 30 hours
  Pre-assignment & online activity: 30 hours

  Content periodicity

  20.10.2020 11.00 - 14.00 : What is culture? What is family-, national-, organizational- and business culture?
  
  27.10.2020 11.00 - 14.00: What are the roots of culture? How culture influences management and the functioning of an organization?
  
  03.11.2020 11.00 - 14.00: Reflection of last two lessons
  
  10.11.2020 11.00 - 14.00: How to deal with cultural challenges in forming group/team and leading people with diverse cultural background?
  
  24.11.2020 11.00 - 14.00: What are the crucial issues to remember while negotiating internationally?
  
  01.12.2020 11.00 - 14.00: Project presentation
  
  08.12.2020 11.00 - 14.00 : Feedback, reflection & way forward

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Unable to attend to at least 3 lessons & not done the course project

  Satisfactory

  The student can define culture and recognises cultural differences. He/she is aware of the course load and able to do routine tasks. The student can give and receive feedback and can do project work in a group. He/she considers and assesses things from his/her viewpoints. The student can work in a group. He/she judges things mainly from his/her own perspective.

  Good

  The student compares culture and explains its impact on different social entities. He/she helps to apply cultural approach in leading a multicultural workforce. The student as a resource person assists in solving problems in leading a multicultural workforce or building a multicultural team. He/she helps making a plan for dealing with cultural differences effectively. He/she considers and assesses issues from multicultural perspectives and can engage in negotiation with counterparts from another culture. The student becomes a responsible member of a diverse group.

  Excellent

  The student understands culture from multiple perspectives and analyses its impact on different social entities including business organisations. The student as a resource person acts independently or as part of a group in leading a multicultural workforce or building a multicultural team. He/she assists in finding solutions to team in dealing with cultural differences effectively. He/she actively engages himself/herself in the work group in finding solutions to problems at hand or adopting policy regarding a culture lenient motivational plan. Moreover, the student can play a flexible role in multicultural negotiation context.

•   Marketing in the Digital World 3B00DW59-3001 08.03.2021-09.04.2021  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  A minority of companies still rate their digital communications or customer communications at an advanced level. Instead they are still in the phase of transformation and development of their digital marketing capabilities. This course is not only about digital marketing – it is about marketing in a digital world. It will give the students skills in planning and executing digital marketing. The key question is: how can companies, both BtoC and BtoB, benefit from digitalizing their marketing operations.
  
  The course consists of theory lectures and weekly exercises where some of the digital marketing tools are used in practice.
  
  After completing the course the students will be able to
  • describe and explain the various forms of digital marketing and
  social media
  • design a digital marketing roadmap for a company
  • use the tools of social media in business to establish a social
  media marketing campaing
  • create basic web pages, a blog or an online shop

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing or equivalent

  Course contents

  What is digital marketing?
  What are the opportunities and threats of digital marketing?
  What are the digital marketing media and tools?
  How can a company enter the digital world in a structured and planned way?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student has introductory knowledge of digital marketing practices but lacks an active role in creating and publishing content for the purpose. In a team his/her role is merely passive and he/she requires help from others to cope with his/her own tasks.

  Good

  The student has basic knowledge of digital marketing and is able to independently take responsibility of his/her own learning as well as support other team members. He/she is an active contributor to the team, is able to understand and use social media channels for digital marketing and can provide good digital content to engage customers.

  Excellent

  The student has advanced knowledge of digital marketing tools, is independent, takes full responsibility of his/her own learning and helps other team members to succeed. He/she understands well the dynamics of social media channels in marketing and is able to create attractive digital content to engage existing customers and attract new ones.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Articles
  - Case studies
  - Videos
  - Assigned E-books

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will consist Online Zoom lessons, individual assignments, team work, team presentations and an internal Instagram project. Teams will work on practical cases provided by external businesses in the areas of social media marketing plans and strategies, website assistance, etc. Internal Instagram project will serve as a tool to practce lessons learned (content creation, understanding the platform from a marketing perspective etc.).

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The course passing criteria consists of successful individual tasks and passed team work.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2021 - 09.04.2021

  Registration

  17.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Cooperation with external businesses

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  Some of the teams may have cases from abroad.

  Students use of time and load

  The course will be intensive and carried out in one and half months calendar time. Students should be prepared for even load throughout the course.

  Content periodicity

  Contact days and internal project will discuss topical digital marketing areas. External customer project will run parallel.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student fails to pass most of the individual assignments and participates in team more as a follower than as an active contributor.

  Satisfactory

  The student has introductory knowledge of digital marketing practices, but lacks still active own role in creating and publishing content for the purpose. In a team his/her role is still merely passive and he/she requires help from others to cope with own tasks

  Good

  The student has basic knowledge of digital marketing and is able to independently take responsibility of his/her own learning and even support other team members. He/she is an active contributor in team, is able to understand and use social media channels for digital marketing and can provide good digital content to engage customers.

  Excellent

  The student has advanced knowledge of digital marketing tools, is independent, takes full responsibility of his/her own learning and helps other team members to succeed, too. He/she understands well the dynamics of social media channels in marketing and is able to create attractive digital content to engage customers and to get new customers.

•   Marketing in the Digital World 3B00DW59-3002 08.03.2021-09.04.2021  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  A minority of companies still rate their digital communications or customer communications at an advanced level. Instead they are still in the phase of transformation and development of their digital marketing capabilities. This course is not only about digital marketing – it is about marketing in a digital world. It will give the students skills in planning and executing digital marketing. The key question is: how can companies, both BtoC and BtoB, benefit from digitalizing their marketing operations.
  
  The course consists of theory lectures and weekly exercises where some of the digital marketing tools are used in practice.
  
  After completing the course the students will be able to
  • describe and explain the various forms of digital marketing and
  social media
  • design a digital marketing roadmap for a company
  • use the tools of social media in business to establish a social
  media marketing campaing
  • create basic web pages, a blog or an online shop

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing or equivalent

  Course contents

  What is digital marketing?
  What are the opportunities and threats of digital marketing?
  What are the digital marketing media and tools?
  How can a company enter the digital world in a structured and planned way?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student has introductory knowledge of digital marketing practices but lacks an active role in creating and publishing content for the purpose. In a team his/her role is merely passive and he/she requires help from others to cope with his/her own tasks.

  Good

  The student has basic knowledge of digital marketing and is able to independently take responsibility of his/her own learning as well as support other team members. He/she is an active contributor to the team, is able to understand and use social media channels for digital marketing and can provide good digital content to engage customers.

  Excellent

  The student has advanced knowledge of digital marketing tools, is independent, takes full responsibility of his/her own learning and helps other team members to succeed. He/she understands well the dynamics of social media channels in marketing and is able to create attractive digital content to engage existing customers and attract new ones.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Articles
  - Case studies
  - Videos
  - Assigned E-books

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will consist Online Zoom lessons, individual assignments, team work, team presentations and an internal Instagram project. Teams will work on practical cases provided by external businesses in the areas of social media marketing plans and strategies, website assistance, etc. Internal Instagram project will serve as a tool to practce lessons learned (content creation, understanding the platform from a marketing perspective etc.).

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The course passing criteria consists of successful individual tasks and passed team work.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2021 - 09.04.2021

  Registration

  17.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 0

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Cooperation with external businesses

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  Some of the teams may have cases from abroad.

  Students use of time and load

  The course will be intensive and carried out in one and half months calendar time. Students should be prepared for even load throughout the course.

  Content periodicity

  Contact days and internal project will discuss topical digital marketing areas. External customer project will run parallel.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student fails to pass most of the individual assignments and participates in team more as a follower than as an active contributor.

  Satisfactory

  The student has introductory knowledge of digital marketing practices, but lacks still active own role in creating and publishing content for the purpose. In a team his/her role is still merely passive and he/she requires help from others to cope with own tasks

  Good

  The student has basic knowledge of digital marketing and is able to independently take responsibility of his/her own learning and even support other team members. He/she is an active contributor in team, is able to understand and use social media channels for digital marketing and can provide good digital content to engage customers.

  Excellent

  The student has advanced knowledge of digital marketing tools, is independent, takes full responsibility of his/her own learning and helps other team members to succeed, too. He/she understands well the dynamics of social media channels in marketing and is able to create attractive digital content to engage customers and to get new customers.

•   Mathematics of Finance 3B00DV93-3003 28.10.2020-09.12.2020  2 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This straightforward exercise based course provides the students with information and hands-on skills of selected fundamental parts of business mathematics.
  
  The time value of money theory forms the foundation of the course. The predetermined main objectives for the students are to learn to apply the theory, solve problems and communicate the problems, their solutions as well as the achieved new understanding effectively.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Identify opportunities for mathematical problem solving involved with the time value of money concept and theory.
  • Find out the present and future values of invested money in different cases of compounding.
  • Compare interest rates, returns on investments and cash flows utilizing the effective rate, present value and net present value concepts.
  • Find out the present and future value as well as the periodic payment of an ordinary annuity.
  • Prepare simple loan amortization schedules and calculate amortizations in MS Excel.
  • Communicate mathematical problems, their solutions and interpretations briefly and informatively.

  Course contents

  • What are the simple interest, growth percentage and sum of sequence all about?
  • How are various compound interest and effective rate calculations solved?
  • How are the present value and net present value (NPV) determined?
  • What different types of annuities are there, and how are the periodic payment and the present and future values of an ordinary annuity determined?
  • How can loan amortization schedules be prepared and loans become amortized?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of mathematics of finance. The student can solve basic level compound interest and present value problems. The student can take responsibility for any of his individual duties in routine mathematics of finance activities and is able to make some contribution in a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of explaining the concepts and methods of mathematics of finance and applying them in cases of reasonable difficulty. The student works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve compound interest, present value and annuity exercises and problems as well as interpret the answers for the benefit of business projects and activities. His/her courses of action are well justified.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse mathematics of business exercises and work on related business cases
  
  individually. The student is able to choose approaches and construct equations and formulas applying the assigned mathematics of finance theory skillfully. The student can produce analyses and correct solutions to compound interest, present value and annuity problems as well as interpret the answers profoundly for the benefit of business projects and activities. The student’s courses of action are very well justified, and he/she makes noticeable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly in a committed manner.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Access to and hints about necessary theory, exercises, and other learning material are there in Moodle.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Instructor's brief introductions of the themes, theories, methods and formulas. Mathematical problem solving both under supervision in the class and individually and/or as pairwork between the classes. Model answers and discussion based on them finish each main theme of the course.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The overall course performance is evaluated and graded using:
  - a 20% weight on performing exercises acceptably during the course
  - a 20% weight on student's other overall activity, incl. sharing solutions and other mathematics of finance information with fellow students, as well as contribution to the common learning sessions and discussions
  - a 60% weight on the exam.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  28.10.2020 - 09.12.2020

  Registration

  16.09.2020 - 15.10.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács

  Further information for students

  Mr Adrián Somlósi-Kovács
  adrian.somlosi-kovacs@tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Exam schedule

  The course includes a small open-book exam.
  Retake exams according to TAMK rules (e.g., in January).

  Students use of time and load

  The student's workload is max. 52-54h, in Oct-Dec 2020.

  Content periodicity

  (See the Contents and Objectives of the Course categories.)

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student has not solved all the required exercises. Or the student has many incorrect answers and/or is not able to show his/her understanding of the required course contents.
  Or, student has not passed the exam.

  Satisfactory

  Student has many incorrect answers as end results of his/her calculations. His/her solutions, anyway, mostly prove that he/she has, anyway, mostly understood the theories, methods and practices of the course contents.
  The student has passed the exam.

  Good

  Student has mostly correct answers as end results of his/her calculations. His/her solutions prove that he/she has also understood the theories, methods and practices of the course contents. Student's proven skills of also communicating and sharing his/her knowledge of the course contents during the course help in achieving the very good grade of 4, instead of the good 3.
  The student has passed the exam with, at least, a strong satisfactory performance.

  Excellent

  Student has in practice only correct answers as end results of his/her calculations. His/her solutions prove that he/she has also understood the theories, methods and practices of the course contents very well. Student's highly desired habit of also communicating and sharing his/her knowledge of the course contents together with the other course participants is an additional big plus in his/her also otherwise excellent performance.
  The student has passed the exam with, at least, a very good grade of 4.

•   Mathematics of Finance 3B00DV93-3004 28.10.2020-09.12.2020  2 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This straightforward exercise based course provides the students with information and hands-on skills of selected fundamental parts of business mathematics.
  
  The time value of money theory forms the foundation of the course. The predetermined main objectives for the students are to learn to apply the theory, solve problems and communicate the problems, their solutions as well as the achieved new understanding effectively.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Identify opportunities for mathematical problem solving involved with the time value of money concept and theory.
  • Find out the present and future values of invested money in different cases of compounding.
  • Compare interest rates, returns on investments and cash flows utilizing the effective rate, present value and net present value concepts.
  • Find out the present and future value as well as the periodic payment of an ordinary annuity.
  • Prepare simple loan amortization schedules and calculate amortizations in MS Excel.
  • Communicate mathematical problems, their solutions and interpretations briefly and informatively.

  Course contents

  • What are the simple interest, growth percentage and sum of sequence all about?
  • How are various compound interest and effective rate calculations solved?
  • How are the present value and net present value (NPV) determined?
  • What different types of annuities are there, and how are the periodic payment and the present and future values of an ordinary annuity determined?
  • How can loan amortization schedules be prepared and loans become amortized?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of mathematics of finance. The student can solve basic level compound interest and present value problems. The student can take responsibility for any of his individual duties in routine mathematics of finance activities and is able to make some contribution in a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of explaining the concepts and methods of mathematics of finance and applying them in cases of reasonable difficulty. The student works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve compound interest, present value and annuity exercises and problems as well as interpret the answers for the benefit of business projects and activities. His/her courses of action are well justified.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse mathematics of business exercises and work on related business cases
  
  individually. The student is able to choose approaches and construct equations and formulas applying the assigned mathematics of finance theory skillfully. The student can produce analyses and correct solutions to compound interest, present value and annuity problems as well as interpret the answers profoundly for the benefit of business projects and activities. The student’s courses of action are very well justified, and he/she makes noticeable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly in a committed manner.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács

  Recommended or required reading

  Access to and hints about necessary theory, exercises, and other learning material are there in Moodle.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Instructor's brief introductions of the themes, theories, methods and formulas. Mathematical problem solving both under supervision in the class and individually and/or as pairwork between the classes. Model answers and discussion based on them finish each main theme of the course.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The overall course performance is evaluated and graded using:
  - a 20% weight on performing exercises acceptably during the course
  - a 20% weight on student's other overall activity, incl. sharing solutions and other mathematics of finance information with fellow students, as well as contribution to the common learning sessions and discussions
  - a 60% weight on the exam.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  28.10.2020 - 09.12.2020

  Registration

  16.09.2020 - 15.10.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács

  Further information for students

  Mr Adrián Somlósi-Kovács
  adrian.somlosi-kovacs@tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Exam schedule

  The course includes a small open-book exam.
  Retake exams according to TAMK rules (e.g., in January).

  Students use of time and load

  The student's workload is max. 52-54h, in Oct-Dec 2020.

  Content periodicity

  (See the Contents and Objectives of the Course categories.)

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student has not solved all the required exercises. Or the student has many incorrect answers and/or is not able to show his/her understanding of the required course contents.
  Or, student has not passed the exam.

  Satisfactory

  Student has many incorrect answers as end results of his/her calculations. His/her solutions, anyway, mostly prove that he/she has, anyway, mostly understood the theories, methods and practices of the course contents.
  The student has passed the exam.

  Good

  Student has mostly correct answers as end results of his/her calculations. His/her solutions prove that he/she has also understood the theories, methods and practices of the course contents. Student's proven skills of also communicating and sharing his/her knowledge of the course contents during the course help in achieving the very good grade of 4, instead of the good 3.
  The student has passed the exam with, at least, a strong satisfactory performance.

  Excellent

  Student has in practice only correct answers as end results of his/her calculations. His/her solutions prove that he/she has also understood the theories, methods and practices of the course contents very well. Student's highly desired habit of also communicating and sharing his/her knowledge of the course contents together with the other course participants is an additional big plus in his/her also otherwise excellent performance.
  The student has passed the exam with, at least, a very good grade of 4.

•   Modern Leadership Skills 3B00DW43-3001 24.08.2020-16.10.2020  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course is focused on contemporary leadership theories, practices and skills that are needed to lead oneself and others ethically and effectively in a fast changing business environment.
  
  After completing of the course, students will be able to:
  1) define the role and responsibilities of a manager and leader in different organisations
  2) understand their individual life motives that impact their leadership behaviour
  3) create strategies for motivating and leading others in different situations
  4) apply some essential leadership theories and practices in a fast changing environment
  5) help other succeed by using some coaching techniques

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  First year BBA studies

  Course contents

  - Motivation theories and 16 life motives
  - Leading yourself & stress management
  - Modern leadership theories, practices and styles
  - Change management
  - Coaching skills

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student defines the role and the responsibilities of a manager and a leader. He/she has a vague knowledge of his/her own individual life motives and superficial understanding about motivating and leading others. With the help of others, he/she can solve simple people-related problems using some of the leadership theories and practices. The student is able to apply some very basic coaching skills to certain extent. He/she can give feedback but mainly considers and assesses things from his/her own point of view without being able to assess his/her own behaviour critically or showing strong empathy towards others.

  Good

  The student explains the role and the responsibilities of a manager and a leader. He/she identifies some of his/her individual life motives and is able to draw conclusions to his/her actions based on the information. The student applies usual strategies for motivating and leading others. He/she can solve some people-related problems with the help of the most common leadership theories and practices. The student is able to apply some coaching skills but still needs a lot of practice to help others develop better. He/she can give feedback actively and constructively but is not very well able to assess his/her own leadership behaviour critically.

  Excellent

  The student understands the role and the responsibilities of a manager and a leader. He/she analyses his/her own actions and behaviours with the help of his/her individual life motives. The student creates new strategies for motivating and leading others. He/she combines leadership theories and practices for solving challenging people-related cases. The student is able to apply some coaching skills in a professional manner. He/she uses feedback systematically to help others develop and is able to assess his/her own leadership behaviour critically.

  Further information

  Main learning methods are practical exercises and skills training with other students. Presence in lectures is required.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Kouzes and Posner - The Leadership Challenge
  Cameron and Green - Making Sense of Change Management
  Articles and other resources as given during the lectures

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Interactive lectures
  Reading
  Exercises
  Group exam
  Writing "My Leadership Handbook"

  Assessment methods and criteria

  1) Open book group exam "Challenging leadership cases" - Grading: 0-5
  The group exam consists of several realistic cases where the students can apply their knowledge about different aspects of leadership. The cases will be solved in small teams that are created in the beginning of the course.
  2) Individual "My Leadership Handbook" - Grading: 0-5
  The handbook is good (3) if
  • Lectures and discussions are clearly utilized
  • Three of the suggested sources have been used
  • The topics have been reflected through the person's own life and/or work experiences
  • Peer group feedback has been used for the final version of the Handbook¨
  • References have been used and marked correctly

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  24.08.2020 - 16.10.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 24.08.2020

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Päivi Mayor, Sven Rassl

  Further information for students

  In this interactive online course, all participants are asked to regularly keep both the cameras and microphones on unless asked differently by the teacher.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  1 cr

  Virtual proportion

  5 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None.

  Training and labour cooperation

  This course will build on the students' current and previous practical leadership experiences.

  Exam schedule

  Mandatory open book group exam on "Challenging leadership cases" on September 30, 2020.

  International connections

  International cases and the experiences of interational participants will be used.

  Students use of time and load

  135 hours, 5 cr, consisting of about 40 hours of online lectures and 95 hours of individual and group work.

  Content periodicity

  - August 24: Introduction of the course, team building, leading a team
  - August 26: Leadership theories, line management
  - August 31: Leadership practices
  - September 2: Leading yourself, model the way
  - September 7: Inspire a shared vision
  - September 9: Encourage the heart: Motivation
  - September 14: Enable others to act: Coaching skills
  - September 16: Enable others to act: Changing individual behaviour, giving and receiving feedback
  - September 21: Challenge the process: Leading change
  - September 23: Challenge the process: Leading change
  - September 30: GROUP EXAM
  - October 7: Feedback and next steps

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student has not participated in the group exam or has not submitted a complete "My Leadership Handbook".

  Satisfactory

  The student can describe the role and the responsibilities of a line manager. The student remembers some leadership practices and change models and is able to mention them in the group exam. The student analyses the leadership cases, including the motivation factors, but the analysis stays on a superficial level. Suggestions are given for improving the leadership situations but they remain quite shallow and simple. The student has participated in the mandatory lectures but the reflection in the Handbook about the topics shows only superficial understanding of the course topics. The student participates in the team tasks but does not contribute very positively to the team's exam outcome as evaluated by the other team members.

  Good

  The student can apply the different roles and the responsibilities of a line manager when solving challenging leadership cases. The student uses leadership practices and change models in a constructive and logical way in the group exam. The student analyses the leadership cases, including the motivation factors, and the analysis is quite detailed. Concrete, realistic and understandable leadership suggestions are given for improving the situation. The student has participated in all or most lectures and the reflection in the Handbook about the topics shows quite good understanding of the course topics. Main leadership theories and practices have been compared with student's own prior experiences about leadership. The student participates well team tasks and contributes positively to the team's exam outcome as evaluated by the other team members.

  Excellent

  The student can justify the different roles and the responsibilities of a line manager when solving challenging leadership cases. The student uses leadership practices and change models in a constructive and very logical way in the group exam. The student analyses the leadership cases, including the motivation factors, and the analysis is detailed. Realistic, creative and understandable leadership suggestions are given for improving the situation. The student has participated in all or most lectures and the reflection in the Handbook about the topics shows thorough understanding and critical thinking about the course topics. Main leadership theories and practices have been compared with student's own prior experiences about leadership and new interpretations and and solutions for the future have been developed. The student leads him/herself well under pressure and contributes very positively to the team's exam outcome as evaluated by the other team members.

•   Operations Management 3B00DW29-3001 27.08.2020-08.10.2020  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Operations Management (OM) is a discipline that applies to restaurants, cafe as well as to factories like Ford and Whirlpool. The techniques of OM apply throughout the world to virtualyy all productive enterprise. It doesn't matter if the application is in an office, a hospital, a restaurant, a department store, or a factory- the production of goods and services requires operations management. The course covers the basic aspects of OM including operations in services and production.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  - Manage the operations and processes in services and production
  
  - Calculate the productivity and labour-productivity
  
  - know how to design a service and product in order to minimize the inventory cost and design an optimal Supply Chain (Sustainable design )
  
  - Know the forecasting methods
  
  - Know the techniques of Material Requirement Planning

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Operations and Productivity
  
  - Forecasting
  
  - Design of goods and services
  
  - Aggregate Planning and MRP
  
  - JIT, SCORE Model and Lean Operations

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to recognise and analyse the organisation's processes and understand the basic principles of how they work together. The student understands the basic methodology of how to improve the processes' efficiency and their added value to both internal and external stakeholders. The student understands the importance of various, relevant stakeholders and the way how the information they each represent needs to be connected in order for the entire organisation to operate soundly. The student has a limited ability to plan and steer the organisation's processes.

  Good

  The student is able to map the entire organisation's processes and the way they connect and interact with each other, as both internal and external stakeholders. The student knows several relevant tools which he/she can independently apply in various operations management situations. The student knows how and from where to acquire the necessary systemic information in order to analyse, improve and manage the organisation's processes. The student is capable of adapting to changed requirements depending on which of the life-cycle stages the concerned processes are currently in. The student also understands how the processes are linked to the management supporting ERP-systems.

  Excellent

  The student is able to plan, erect and manage any of the organisation's processes and to apply relevant tools where necessary. The student also knows how to manage the entity of organisation's processes and operations effectively. The student can question any of organisation's operation and focus his/hers attention on relevant attributes in order to improve their overall performance. The student also understands the meaning of channel separation and can apply this both when summoning information and capitalising on the collected information on practical level. The student can also benchmark an organisation and its processes, detecting pertinent bottlenecks or improvement areas. The student possesses also basic managerial strategic knowledge regarding execution of operations and processes.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will be delivered online using Tuni Moodle. Live sessions will be held via Zoom. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  27.08.2020 - 08.10.2020

  Registration

  10.06.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Operations Management 3B00DW29-3002 26.08.2020-09.10.2020  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Operations Management (OM) is a discipline that applies to restaurants, cafe as well as to factories like Ford and Whirlpool. The techniques of OM apply throughout the world to virtualyy all productive enterprise. It doesn't matter if the application is in an office, a hospital, a restaurant, a department store, or a factory- the production of goods and services requires operations management. The course covers the basic aspects of OM including operations in services and production.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  - Manage the operations and processes in services and production
  
  - Calculate the productivity and labour-productivity
  
  - know how to design a service and product in order to minimize the inventory cost and design an optimal Supply Chain (Sustainable design )
  
  - Know the forecasting methods
  
  - Know the techniques of Material Requirement Planning

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Operations and Productivity
  
  - Forecasting
  
  - Design of goods and services
  
  - Aggregate Planning and MRP
  
  - JIT, SCORE Model and Lean Operations

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to recognise and analyse the organisation's processes and understand the basic principles of how they work together. The student understands the basic methodology of how to improve the processes' efficiency and their added value to both internal and external stakeholders. The student understands the importance of various, relevant stakeholders and the way how the information they each represent needs to be connected in order for the entire organisation to operate soundly. The student has a limited ability to plan and steer the organisation's processes.

  Good

  The student is able to map the entire organisation's processes and the way they connect and interact with each other, as both internal and external stakeholders. The student knows several relevant tools which he/she can independently apply in various operations management situations. The student knows how and from where to acquire the necessary systemic information in order to analyse, improve and manage the organisation's processes. The student is capable of adapting to changed requirements depending on which of the life-cycle stages the concerned processes are currently in. The student also understands how the processes are linked to the management supporting ERP-systems.

  Excellent

  The student is able to plan, erect and manage any of the organisation's processes and to apply relevant tools where necessary. The student also knows how to manage the entity of organisation's processes and operations effectively. The student can question any of organisation's operation and focus his/hers attention on relevant attributes in order to improve their overall performance. The student also understands the meaning of channel separation and can apply this both when summoning information and capitalising on the collected information on practical level. The student can also benchmark an organisation and its processes, detecting pertinent bottlenecks or improvement areas. The student possesses also basic managerial strategic knowledge regarding execution of operations and processes.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will be delivered online using Tuni Moodle. Live sessions will be held via Zoom. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  26.08.2020 - 09.10.2020

  Registration

  10.06.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Operations Management 3B00DW29-3005 11.01.2021-26.02.2021  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Operations Management (OM) is a discipline that applies to restaurants, cafe as well as to factories like Ford and Whirlpool. The techniques of OM apply throughout the world to virtualyy all productive enterprise. It doesn't matter if the application is in an office, a hospital, a restaurant, a department store, or a factory- the production of goods and services requires operations management. The course covers the basic aspects of OM including operations in services and production.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  - Manage the operations and processes in services and production
  
  - Calculate the productivity and labour-productivity
  
  - know how to design a service and product in order to minimize the inventory cost and design an optimal Supply Chain (Sustainable design )
  
  - Know the forecasting methods
  
  - Know the techniques of Material Requirement Planning

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Operations and Productivity
  
  - Forecasting
  
  - Design of goods and services
  
  - Aggregate Planning and MRP
  
  - JIT, SCORE Model and Lean Operations

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to recognise and analyse the organisation's processes and understand the basic principles of how they work together. The student understands the basic methodology of how to improve the processes' efficiency and their added value to both internal and external stakeholders. The student understands the importance of various, relevant stakeholders and the way how the information they each represent needs to be connected in order for the entire organisation to operate soundly. The student has a limited ability to plan and steer the organisation's processes.

  Good

  The student is able to map the entire organisation's processes and the way they connect and interact with each other, as both internal and external stakeholders. The student knows several relevant tools which he/she can independently apply in various operations management situations. The student knows how and from where to acquire the necessary systemic information in order to analyse, improve and manage the organisation's processes. The student is capable of adapting to changed requirements depending on which of the life-cycle stages the concerned processes are currently in. The student also understands how the processes are linked to the management supporting ERP-systems.

  Excellent

  The student is able to plan, erect and manage any of the organisation's processes and to apply relevant tools where necessary. The student also knows how to manage the entity of organisation's processes and operations effectively. The student can question any of organisation's operation and focus his/hers attention on relevant attributes in order to improve their overall performance. The student also understands the meaning of channel separation and can apply this both when summoning information and capitalising on the collected information on practical level. The student can also benchmark an organisation and its processes, detecting pertinent bottlenecks or improvement areas. The student possesses also basic managerial strategic knowledge regarding execution of operations and processes.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books (Operations Management, Slack, Chambers et al, multiple versions)
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped classroom sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Independent study and research

  Assessment methods and criteria

  According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
  - Knowing
  - Doing
  - Being

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  11.01.2021 - 26.02.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 10.01.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  21KVHN1

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Project work / project case study

  Exam schedule

  Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

  International connections

  Cases and discussion, global operational business environment

  Students use of time and load

  According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions.
  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Complete the final report and exam
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Details given in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  Student participation has been on adequate level based on course schedule
  
  Student has the basic understanding on Operations management in general
  
  Student has demonstrated basic skills by submitting required tasks and asignments during the course

  Good

  Student's participation has been active during contact lessons and online between lessons.
  
  Student understands operative roles, tasks and challenges
  
  Student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables
  
  Student is capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

  Excellent

  Student has actively partipated and contributed to course implementation
  
  Student has professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of operational model of different organisations
  
  Student has demonstrated high skill level in operational management and created value and shared information to other partipants
  
  Student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

•   Organizational Communication 3B00DW17-3003 01.08.2020-11.12.2020  3 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course covers various aspects of organizational communication, including theoretical background and practical communication activities. It deals with written, verbal and non-verbal communication, focusing on clarity and appropriateness in all situations.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Demonstrate familiarity with theories of organizational communication.
  • Adapt their communication style according to a range of interpersonal factors, such as relative status, degree of familiarity, and cultural norms.
  • Use spoken English and non-verbal language effectively in face-to-face communication.
  • Produce written English texts which meet set norms regarding lay-out, organization, and accuracy.
  • Learn the basics of public relations

  Course contents

  • What are the essentials for effective organizational communication?
  • What are internal communications and public relations?
  • With what communities, groups and individuals do organizations need to communicate?
  • What factors affect the appropriate degree of formality and level of detail required in both face-to-face and written communication?
  • What are the different channels, communication vehicles and activities needed?
  • What discourse types and communication tools are typically used in organizational communication?
  • How to measure success in communication?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the various participants in the communications process and describe communications theory. The student can identify internal and external communications and describe or illustrate the communications process. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present simple, factual information and follow templates to produce routine written communications content. The student is able to communicate in a business environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

  Good

  The student can explain the role of participants and describe the processes of communications theory. The student can explain and apply communications processes to their own business simulation and develop internal and external communications strategies. The student can explain the communication principles of the public relations process, describe, and plan a communications process. The student is able to explain phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English and take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures. The student is able to present complex ideas and information, take account of and adjust communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates the ability to evaluate and adapt their communications approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new communications methods, channels and ideas.

  Excellent

  The student can explain modern theories of communication, analyse the communications structures within an organization, design a public relations response to a business situation and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organization. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization, analyse communications issues and synthesise possible solutions and recognise possible implications. The student can collaborate with fellow learners during the learning process and evaluate different communications approaches. The student can improvise during a presentation to deal with unforeseen challenges and connect ideas and information from diverse sources and synthesis this to construct new understanding. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their communications as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values. He/she is open to new communication methods and ideas, including those driven by modern technological solutions. The student is able to adapt their communications techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Mark Curcher

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials will be provided Moodle and are expected to be supplemented by the student’s own research and enquiry based learning.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Teaching strategies will include lectures, discussion, facilitation, group and individual work. Active participation and collaboration will be essential. Flipped classroom strategies will be also employed for some activities. Students will be expected to demonstrate their learning by presenting work in writing, visually, orally and in presentations.
  The class will fully support the business simulation project and link tasks directly to activities in the simulation to provide an authentic learning experience.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Evaluation of learning will include assessment by self, peer and teacher. Grading criteria rubrics will be provided for assessed tasks and will be based on the principles of authentic learning and assessment and use the SOLO framework – “Structural Observation of Learning Outcomes” (Biggs and Collis, 1982, Biggs 1999).

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 11.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Elena Grigorova

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Not applicable.

  Training and labour cooperation

  The course is fully supportive of the business simulation project the students are undertaking and is based on real life experience of working business and commerce.

  Exam schedule

  Details of the assessment schedule, including any exams, will be provided in Moodle.

  Students use of time and load

  Time and effort as required for a 3 ECTS credit course = 81 hours.

  Content periodicity

  A scheme of work will be provided in Moodle.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the various participants in the communications process and describe communications theory. The student can identify internal and external communications and describe or illustrate the communications process. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present simple, factual information and follow templates to produce routine written communications content. The student is able to communicate in a business environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

  Good

  The student can explain the role of participants and describe the processes of communications theory. The student can explain and apply communications processes to their own business simulation and develop internal and external communications strategies. The student can explain the communication principles of the public relations process, describe, and plan a communications process. The student is able to explain phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English and take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures. The student is able to present complex ideas and information, take account of and adjust communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates the ability to evaluate and adapt their communications approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new communications methods, channels and ideas.

  Excellent

  The student can explain modern theories of communication, analyse the communications structures within an organization, design a public relations response to a business situation and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organization. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization, analyse communications issues and synthesise possible solutions and recognise possible implications. The student can collaborate with fellow learners during the learning process and evaluate different communications approaches. The student can improvise during a presentation to deal with unforeseen challenges and connect ideas and information from diverse sources and synthesis this to construct new understanding. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their communications as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values. He/she is open to new communication methods and ideas, including those driven by modern technological solutions. The student is able to adapt their communications techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

•   Organizational Communication 3B00DW17-3004 01.08.2020-07.12.2020  3 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course covers various aspects of organizational communication, including theoretical background and practical communication activities. It deals with written, verbal and non-verbal communication, focusing on clarity and appropriateness in all situations.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Demonstrate familiarity with theories of organizational communication.
  • Adapt their communication style according to a range of interpersonal factors, such as relative status, degree of familiarity, and cultural norms.
  • Use spoken English and non-verbal language effectively in face-to-face communication.
  • Produce written English texts which meet set norms regarding lay-out, organization, and accuracy.
  • Learn the basics of public relations

  Course contents

  • What are the essentials for effective organizational communication?
  • What are internal communications and public relations?
  • With what communities, groups and individuals do organizations need to communicate?
  • What factors affect the appropriate degree of formality and level of detail required in both face-to-face and written communication?
  • What are the different channels, communication vehicles and activities needed?
  • What discourse types and communication tools are typically used in organizational communication?
  • How to measure success in communication?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the various participants in the communications process and describe communications theory. The student can identify internal and external communications and describe or illustrate the communications process. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present simple, factual information and follow templates to produce routine written communications content. The student is able to communicate in a business environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

  Good

  The student can explain the role of participants and describe the processes of communications theory. The student can explain and apply communications processes to their own business simulation and develop internal and external communications strategies. The student can explain the communication principles of the public relations process, describe, and plan a communications process. The student is able to explain phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English and take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures. The student is able to present complex ideas and information, take account of and adjust communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates the ability to evaluate and adapt their communications approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new communications methods, channels and ideas.

  Excellent

  The student can explain modern theories of communication, analyse the communications structures within an organization, design a public relations response to a business situation and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organization. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization, analyse communications issues and synthesise possible solutions and recognise possible implications. The student can collaborate with fellow learners during the learning process and evaluate different communications approaches. The student can improvise during a presentation to deal with unforeseen challenges and connect ideas and information from diverse sources and synthesis this to construct new understanding. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their communications as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values. He/she is open to new communication methods and ideas, including those driven by modern technological solutions. The student is able to adapt their communications techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Mark Curcher

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials will be provided online in the LMS and are expected to be supplemented by the student’s own research and enquiry based learning.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Teaching strategies will include lectures, discussion, facilitation, group and individual work. Active participation and collaboration will be essential. Flipped classroom strategies will be also employed for some activities. Students will be expected to demonstrate their learning by presenting work in writing, visually, orally and in presentations.
  The class will fully support the business simulation project and link tasks directly to activities in the simulation to provide an authentic learning experience.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Evaluation of learning will include assessment by self, peer and teacher. Grading criteria rubrics will be provided for assessed tasks and will be based on the principles of authentic learning and assessment and use the SOLO framework – “Structural Observation of Learning Outcomes” (Biggs and Collis, 1982, Biggs 1999).

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 07.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Elena Grigorova

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Not applicable.

  Training and labour cooperation

  The course is fully supportive of the business simulation project the students are undertaking and is based on real life experience of working business and commerce.

  Exam schedule

  Details of the assessment schedule, including any exams, will be provided in the Tabula LMS.

  International connections

  The course will examine international organizational communication. Students will consider and reflect upon the impact and diversity of culture to organizational communications, using examples from the instructors and student’s experiences.

  Students use of time and load

  Time and effort as required 3 ECTS credit course = Approx 80 hours.

  Content periodicity

  A scheme of work will be provided in the Tabula LMS.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the various participants in the communications process and describe communications theory. The student can identify internal and external communications and describe or illustrate the communications process. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present simple, factual information and follow templates to produce routine written communications content. The student is able to communicate in a business environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

  Good

  The student can explain the role of participants and describe the processes of communications theory. The student can explain and apply communications processes to their own business simulation and develop internal and external communications strategies. The student can explain the communication principles of the public relations process, describe, and plan a communications process. The student is able to explain phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English and take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures. The student is able to present complex ideas and information, take account of and adjust communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates the ability to evaluate and adapt their communications approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new communications methods, channels and ideas.

  Excellent

  The student can explain modern theories of communication, analyse the communications structures within an organization, design a public relations response to a business situation and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organization. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization, analyse communications issues and synthesise possible solutions and recognise possible implications. The student can collaborate with fellow learners during the learning process and evaluate different communications approaches. The student can improvise during a presentation to deal with unforeseen challenges and connect ideas and information from diverse sources and synthesis this to construct new understanding. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their communications as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values. He/she is open to new communication methods and ideas, including those driven by modern technological solutions. The student is able to adapt their communications techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

•   Performance Management and Control 3B00DW51-3001 11.01.2021-12.03.2021  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course offers the students a chance to enhance their knowledge and managerial skills of financial planning and control as well as performance measurement and evaluation to a professional level.
  
  The course is based on modern management accounting methods, frameworks and practices, laying a solid foundation on which continuing business studies and a serious business career in the field of accounting and finance can be built later on. The contents and learning experiences of the course are planned to be useful and generally applicable for every business professional.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  
  Prepare the major budgets of a company and participate in creation of budgeting systems.
  Analyze business performance and participate in decision-making and business planning using standard budget reports.
  Create business forecasts for the future, based on budget reports and other relevant business information.
  Calculate the value of economic value added (EVA®) measure and utilize the DuPont approach to the return on investment (ROI) measure.
  Participate in planning and implementing tailor-made strategic performance management solutions for various business cases.
  Consider and try to include the effects of latest technological innovations and human aspects in any of their later business development projects.

  Course contents

  Which budgets does a modern budgeting system – “The Master Budget” – include, and how can a tailored version be constructed?
  How can the planning and control processes of a decentralized organization be managed using budgets, reports and supporting IT tools?
  What different approaches are there for strategic performance measurement and evaluation?
  What are the roles of human considerations, e.g. gaming, intangible assets and management myopia, as part of system creation?
  How are the values of advanced measures such as economic value added (EVA®) calculated, and how can business reporting become more lively through visualization?
  How can technology help in planning and control; what kind of insights do e.g. ERP systems, business intelligence and the current strong development of digitalization, mobile services and Internet of Things (IoT) offer to companies?
  How is a strategy-bound performance management framework built and used in practice?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of financial planning and control as well as the performance measurement and evaluation theme sufficiently. He/she can take responsibility for his individual financial planning and reporting duties in routine activities, and is able to make some contribution in a group.

  Good

  The student achieves the competence of applying and explaining the concepts and methods of financial planning and control as well as the performance measurement and evaluation theme in controllable situations. He/she works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve financial planning and measurement problems, and his courses of action are well justified.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse complex situations and produce alternative solution proposals to various financial planning and control as well as performance measurement and evaluation tasks and problems. He/she is able to apply his extensive knowledge and skills of the subject matter creatively in problem solving, solution tracing, new experiments, and when generalising his well-justified courses of action. The student can work strongly individually and make remarkable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly with excellent commitment.

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  11.01.2021 - 12.03.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 19.01.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Practical Training in Finland 3B00CX24-3003 01.08.2020-31.12.2020  30 cr  (18IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Practical training will familiarize the students in a supervised manner with the practical work assignments of the field studied as well as application of knowledge and skills in working life. In the International Business programme, the Finnish students look for a practical training place abroad, while the foreign students seek for a job in Finland.
  
  The Practical Training (5 months = 30 credits) must be a full-time position. The training can be done in no more than two parts. The shortest accepted full-time position can be of one month in length. Before starting the practical training, the students will need to participate in a practical training orientation program, which will be arranged during the late autumn term of the second year. The student must contact the Practical Training Supervisor well in advance before the work placement and a written agreement on the practical training is required.
  
  After and during the practical training, the students will be able to:
  
  Learn the organizational culture of the employer and rules of the working life.
  Apply learned theory and skills with practice.
  Learn practicalities of the field studied.
  Be able to plan their career based on their practical training experience.
  Create networks with the employer and the working life.
  Collect ideas for the final thesis.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What does supervised practical training mean?
  What are the tasks of a BBA?
  How to act as a member of a work community?
  What are my strengths and ‘development areas’ in the working life?

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Guidelines for Practical Training are discussed during the Practical Training Orientation. Description of Practical Training can be found in IB Curriculum and more detailed guidelines in TAMK Intra, student's handbook.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Before starting the practical training the students will need to participate in a Practical Training Orientation which will be arranged during the autumn term of the second study year. The student must contact the Practical Training Supervisor at TAMK well in advance before signing the practical training agreement. A written agreement is always required. Students will have a supervisor both in the company and at TAMK during their practical training. Students are writing reports and weekly diaries during the practical training period.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  During the practical training the TAMK BBA students are building their knowledge and practical skills in the field of their chosen mandatory module of the TAMK BBA programme. Evaluation is based on practical training reports and final discussion after the practical training period -> pass.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 31.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 08.09.2020

  Credits

  30 cr

  Group(s)

  18IB

  Teacher(s)

  Marita Tuomala, Janne Hopeela

  Further information for students

  For more information please contact either:
  Marita Tuomala; marita.tuomala@tuni.fi or
  Janne Hopeela; janne.hopeela@tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  Pass/Fail

  Completion alternatives

  In case of accreditation of your previous work experience please contact either Ms. Tuomala or Mr. Hopeela

  Training and labour cooperation

  During the practical training period the students will learn the organizational culture of the employer and rules of the working life. Students will find the work placement themselves. Students are able to use TAMK's Y-Makers portal to find internships.

  Exam schedule

  No exam. Students are writing reports and weekly diaries during the practical training period.

  International connections

  Finnish degree students are recommended to look for practical training positions abroad and foreign degree students either in Finland or abroad. We have some international connections; please contact your practical training supervisors.

  Students use of time and load

  The practical training is 30 ECTS which equals 5 months of full-time work (20 working weeks). The practical training can be done in no more than two parts.

  Content periodicity

  During the practical training period the students will learn the organizational culture of the employer and rules of the working life. The Practical Training Orientation will be arranged during the autumn term of the second study year. Usually the practical training will take place after the second study year and / or during the third study year.

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Pass - when all the required reports and a copy of the work certificate have been returned to the practical training supervisor and the feedback discussion has taken place between the student and the practical training supervisor at TAMK.

•   Product Costing and Financial Analysis 3B00DW09-3004 08.03.2021-23.04.2021  3 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This two-part course provides the students with cornerstone level information of both product costing and pricing as well as financial closing analysis. Relevant theoretical accounting information is used as important supporting learning material. As the most important thing, anyway, the approach and mode of operations are truly practical all through the course.
  
  The first part of the course introduces the product costing and pricing theme to the students. Key terms and concepts are defined, and the students learn to use especially their new job costing knowledge and skills by solving basic-level costing and pricing exercises. Studying the cost - volume - profit (C-V-P) analysis and the break-even analysis themes finishes the first part of the course.
  
  The second part of the course has its focus on ready-made financial closing information and financial key ratios based on that. In this section, the students are supervised to have their own little research on both financial statements of some publicly traded company and their own practice firm. In addition to that, several most commonly applied financial key ratios under categories profitability, liquidity and solvency are introduced to the students, and they read about, interpret and solve the values of them in practice.
  
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Solve basic-level product costing and pricing problems, using especially the job-costing method.
  Perform C-V-P and break-even analyses, and use the analysis results in practice.
  Participate in business planning and decision making, proving various decision makers with reliable product profitability information.
  Read and interpret financial closing information of the income statements, balance sheets and cash flow statements.
  Calculate the values of the most common profitability measures gross profit, operating profit, net profit, return on assets and return on equity.
  Evaluate the performance of companies also based on liquidity measures such as working capital, current and quick ratio as well as turnovers of A/R and inventory.
  Find out the debt and/or equity ratio of a company.
  Measure, evaluate and analyze the financial performance of a company, using a many-sided set of financial key ratios.
  Based on the analysis work done, decide on case-specific business planning issues.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What do the different numerous costing and pricing terms and concepts mean in practice?
  How is product costing and pricing implemented in practice, applying job costing?
  What other alternative costing and pricing methods are there, and when are they applicable?
  How are the C-V-P and break-even analyses performed, and how can the analysis results be used in businesses?
  What are the most meaningful and important pieces of information on the financial statements, and how can the income statement and balance sheet information be used in external decision making?
  Which measures of profitability can be identified and easily used in practice?
  What are the definitions and uses of different liquidity measures?
  How is solvency measured; is it simply given as a part of financial closing, or can it be planned?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of product costing and financial closing analysis themes sufficiently. The student can take responsibility of his/her individual product costing and financial closing analysis duties in routine activities, and is able to make some contribution in a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of understanding and explaining the concepts and methods of the product costing and financial closing analysis themes, and can apply them in controllable situations. The student works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve product-costing problems and produce financial closing analyses, and his/her courses of action are well justified.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse complex situations and produce alternative solution proposals to various product costing and financial closing analysis tasks and problems. The student is able to apply his/her knowledge and skills of the subject matter creatively in data collection, analyses and calculations, problem solving, and when interpreting and sharing his/her well-justified solutions. The student can work strongly individually and make remarkable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly with excellent commitment.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2021 - 23.04.2021

  Registration

  10.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Seats

  15 - 0

  Teacher(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Product Costing and Financial Analysis 3B00DW09-3005 08.03.2021-23.04.2021  3 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This two-part course provides the students with cornerstone level information of both product costing and pricing as well as financial closing analysis. Relevant theoretical accounting information is used as important supporting learning material. As the most important thing, anyway, the approach and mode of operations are truly practical all through the course.
  
  The first part of the course introduces the product costing and pricing theme to the students. Key terms and concepts are defined, and the students learn to use especially their new job costing knowledge and skills by solving basic-level costing and pricing exercises. Studying the cost - volume - profit (C-V-P) analysis and the break-even analysis themes finishes the first part of the course.
  
  The second part of the course has its focus on ready-made financial closing information and financial key ratios based on that. In this section, the students are supervised to have their own little research on both financial statements of some publicly traded company and their own practice firm. In addition to that, several most commonly applied financial key ratios under categories profitability, liquidity and solvency are introduced to the students, and they read about, interpret and solve the values of them in practice.
  
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Solve basic-level product costing and pricing problems, using especially the job-costing method.
  Perform C-V-P and break-even analyses, and use the analysis results in practice.
  Participate in business planning and decision making, proving various decision makers with reliable product profitability information.
  Read and interpret financial closing information of the income statements, balance sheets and cash flow statements.
  Calculate the values of the most common profitability measures gross profit, operating profit, net profit, return on assets and return on equity.
  Evaluate the performance of companies also based on liquidity measures such as working capital, current and quick ratio as well as turnovers of A/R and inventory.
  Find out the debt and/or equity ratio of a company.
  Measure, evaluate and analyze the financial performance of a company, using a many-sided set of financial key ratios.
  Based on the analysis work done, decide on case-specific business planning issues.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What do the different numerous costing and pricing terms and concepts mean in practice?
  How is product costing and pricing implemented in practice, applying job costing?
  What other alternative costing and pricing methods are there, and when are they applicable?
  How are the C-V-P and break-even analyses performed, and how can the analysis results be used in businesses?
  What are the most meaningful and important pieces of information on the financial statements, and how can the income statement and balance sheet information be used in external decision making?
  Which measures of profitability can be identified and easily used in practice?
  What are the definitions and uses of different liquidity measures?
  How is solvency measured; is it simply given as a part of financial closing, or can it be planned?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of product costing and financial closing analysis themes sufficiently. The student can take responsibility of his/her individual product costing and financial closing analysis duties in routine activities, and is able to make some contribution in a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of understanding and explaining the concepts and methods of the product costing and financial closing analysis themes, and can apply them in controllable situations. The student works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve product-costing problems and produce financial closing analyses, and his/her courses of action are well justified.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse complex situations and produce alternative solution proposals to various product costing and financial closing analysis tasks and problems. The student is able to apply his/her knowledge and skills of the subject matter creatively in data collection, analyses and calculations, problem solving, and when interpreting and sharing his/her well-justified solutions. The student can work strongly individually and make remarkable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly with excellent commitment.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2021 - 23.04.2021

  Registration

  10.01.2021 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Seats

  15 - 0

  Teacher(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Professional Development 3B00DW19-3003 24.08.2020-03.05.2021  4 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course covers essential information on studying at TAMK IB programme. Professional Development course encourages the students to adopt a professional approach to their studies, and develop working habits appropriate to working life. As a practical approach students will study in teams who will set up a virtual company. Professional Development course includes weekly team meetings with assigned coach.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Know the contents of IB programme and TAMK learning environment
  • Have a plan for completing their studies in the IB programme, taking into consideration their priorities, long-term goals, strengths and weaknesses.
  • Know what self-motivated learning is and know how to develop teamwork skills in multicultural environment
  • Know how to develop study skills, e.g. learning strategies and time management skills.
  • Know the practical training process and how to apply for a job.
  • Know how the international study exchange process works in practice.

  Course contents

  • What regulations do all TAMK students need to follow?
  • What requirements apply specifically to the International Business degree programme?
  • What skills do I need to work in multicultural teams?
  • How can I develop my study skills and manage my time better?
  • What does supervised practical training mean?
  • How do I plan my international study exchange?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to name teamwork roles and principles. The student recognises team development phases. The student can act as a team member. The student can give and receive feedback.

  Good

  The student applies teamwork principles in his/her own team behavior. The student is able to solve teamwork tasks and teamwork related problems. The student takes responsibility and commits to teamwork. The student develops his/her own teamwork skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands how effective team works in professional context. The student is able to adopt different team roles in various team tasks creatively. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively in a team. The student contributes actively to improve team’s performance and collective action.

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  24.08.2020 - 03.05.2021

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 31.08.2020

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB5

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén, Marita Tuomala, Tuomo Soini, Annikka Lepola

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Professional Selling 3B00DW31-3001 21.10.2020-09.12.2020  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to
  
  • Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment.
  • Manage a sales process both in b-to-c and b-to-b sales situations.
  • Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process.
  • Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in b-to-c and b-to-b settings?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other, selected countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

  Approved/Failed

  Not approved 
  
  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process. 

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials will be uploaded to the course Moodle page weekly.
  
  Shared learning material in Moodle Presentations Articles Videos
  Library for data collection (methods and links)
  Models for process planning, implementation and evaluation.
  Your own notes and remarks

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures in the virtual classroom
  - Independent studies based on provided materials
  - Sales process simulation assignments and practice individually and with partners

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Weekly exams in different forms (assignments, games, reports, or other) will be announced in class.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  21.10.2020 - 09.12.2020

  Registration

  16.09.2020 - 15.10.2020

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Juha Tuominen, Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  You will be guided through learning process by Juha Tuominen and Sean Morga. During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process. Subject theory runs parallel with the implementation of practical training.
  
  After completing the course, the student will be able to:
  - Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment
  - Manage a sales process both in b2c and b2b sales situations
  - Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process
  - Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures
  - Understand the importance of necessary preparation work before contacting prospects
  - Fit the offering into the needs of targeted markets and clients
  - Evaluate, choose and use correct sales and negotiation techniques in various sales situations
  - Measure, analyze and improve personal sales skills

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Training and labour cooperation

  The guest speakers might be visiting the virtual class.

  Exam schedule

  Weekly exams in different forms (assignments, games, reports, or other) will be announced in class.

  International connections

  A view of the assessment of European sales competition (ESC)

  Students use of time and load

  One study credit= 27 hours
  4 credit class = 108 hours
  21 hours of contact teaching
  87 hours of individual work and group exerises

  Content periodicity

  Planned content
  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in a b2c and/or b2b setting?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

•   Professional Selling 3B00DW31-3002 19.10.2020-07.12.2020  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to
  
  • Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment.
  • Manage a sales process both in b-to-c and b-to-b sales situations.
  • Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process.
  • Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in b-to-c and b-to-b settings?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other, selected countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

  Approved/Failed

  Not approved 
  
  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process. 

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials will be uploaded to the course Moodle page weekly.
  
  Shared learning material in Moodle Presentations Articles Videos
  Library for data collection (methods and links)
  Models for process planning, implementation and evaluation.
  Your own notes and remarks

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures in the virtual classroom
  - Independent studies based on provided materials
  - Sales process simulation assignments and practice individually and with partners

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Weekly exams in different forms (assignments, games, reports, or other) will be announced in class.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  19.10.2020 - 07.12.2020

  Registration

  16.09.2020 - 15.10.2020

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  Teacher(s)

  Juha Tuominen, Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  You will be guided through learning process by Juha Tuominen and Sean Morga. During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process. Subject theory runs parallel with the implementation of practical training.
  
  After completing the course, the student will be able to:
  - Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment
  - Manage a sales process both in b2c and b2b sales situations
  - Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process
  - Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures
  - Understand the importance of necessary preparation work before contacting prospects
  - Fit the offering into the needs of targeted markets and clients
  - Evaluate, choose and use correct sales and negotiation techniques in various sales situations
  - Measure, analyze and improve personal sales skills

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Training and labour cooperation

  The guest speakers might be visiting the virtual class.

  Exam schedule

  Weekly exams in different forms (assignments, games, reports, or other) will be announced in class.

  International connections

  A view of the assessment of European sales competition (ESC)

  Students use of time and load

  One study credit= 27 hours
  4 credit class = 108 hours
  21 hours of contact teaching
  87 hours of individual work and group exerises

  Content periodicity

  Planned content
  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in a b2c and/or b2b setting?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

•   Professional Selling 3B00DW31-3004 08.03.2021-29.04.2021  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to
  
  • Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment.
  • Manage a sales process both in b-to-c and b-to-b sales situations.
  • Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process.
  • Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in b-to-c and b-to-b settings?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other, selected countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

  Approved/Failed

  Not approved 
  
  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process. 

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials will be uploaded to the course Moodle page weekly.
  
  Shared learning material in Moodle Presentations Articles Videos
  Library for data collection (methods and links)
  Models for process planning, implementation and evaluation.
  Your own notes and remarks

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures in the virtual classroom
  - Independent studies based on provided materials
  - Sales process simulation assignments and practice individually and with partners

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Weekly exams in different forms (assignments, games, reports, or other) will be announced in class.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2021 - 29.04.2021

  Registration

  11.11.2020 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 0

  Teacher(s)

  Markus Jähi, Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  You will be guided through learning process by Juha Tuominen and Sean Morga. During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process. Subject theory runs parallel with the implementation of practical training.
  
  After completing the course, the student will be able to:
  - Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment
  - Manage a sales process both in b2c and b2b sales situations
  - Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process
  - Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures
  - Understand the importance of necessary preparation work before contacting prospects
  - Fit the offering into the needs of targeted markets and clients
  - Evaluate, choose and use correct sales and negotiation techniques in various sales situations
  - Measure, analyze and improve personal sales skills

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Training and labour cooperation

  The guest speakers might be visiting the virtual class.

  Exam schedule

  Weekly exams in different forms (assignments, games, reports, or other) will be announced in class.

  International connections

  A view of the assessment of European sales competition (ESC)

  Students use of time and load

  One study credit= 27 hours
  4 credit class = 108 hours
  21 hours of contact teaching
  87 hours of individual work and group exerises

  Content periodicity

  Planned content
  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in a b2c and/or b2b setting?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

•   Professional Selling 3B00DW31-3006 10.03.2021-30.04.2021  4 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to
  
  • Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment.
  • Manage a sales process both in b-to-c and b-to-b sales situations.
  • Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process.
  • Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in b-to-c and b-to-b settings?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other, selected countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

  Approved/Failed

  Not approved 
  
  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process. 

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials will be uploaded to the course Moodle page weekly.
  
  Shared learning material in Moodle Presentations Articles Videos
  Library for data collection (methods and links)
  Models for process planning, implementation and evaluation.
  Your own notes and remarks

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures in the virtual classroom
  - Independent studies based on provided materials
  - Sales process simulation assignments and practice individually and with partners

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Weekly exams in different forms (assignments, games, reports, or other) will be announced in class.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  10.03.2021 - 30.04.2021

  Registration

  11.11.2020 - 24.02.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  20KVHN2

  21KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 0

  Teacher(s)

  Juha Ikonen, Markus Jähi

  Further information for students

  You will be guided through learning process by Juha Tuominen and Sean Morga. During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process. Subject theory runs parallel with the implementation of practical training.
  
  After completing the course, the student will be able to:
  - Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment
  - Manage a sales process both in b2c and b2b sales situations
  - Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process
  - Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures
  - Understand the importance of necessary preparation work before contacting prospects
  - Fit the offering into the needs of targeted markets and clients
  - Evaluate, choose and use correct sales and negotiation techniques in various sales situations
  - Measure, analyze and improve personal sales skills

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Training and labour cooperation

  The guest speakers might be visiting the virtual class.

  Exam schedule

  Weekly exams in different forms (assignments, games, reports, or other) will be announced in class.

  International connections

  A view of the assessment of European sales competition (ESC)

  Students use of time and load

  One study credit= 27 hours
  4 credit class = 108 hours
  21 hours of contact teaching
  87 hours of individual work and group exerises

  Content periodicity

  Planned content
  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in a b2c and/or b2b setting?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

•   Professional Swedish for Business, Oral 3B00DW87-3001 27.08.2020-19.12.2020  2 cr  (19IBB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  On this course students will learn about the professional business communication in working life environment. European Framework of Reference for Languages B1 level.
  
  After completing the course students will be able to
  - tell about their personality, education, work experience, tasks and duties at work by using professional Swedish
  - meet customers’ needs when servicing the customer base and communicating with interest groups
  - follow and participate in the development of their field by using different ways of communication (media, conferences, literature).

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What can the student communicate on his/her competence and working life environment in the target language?
  What kind of qualifications does the student need to succeed in multicultural customer-based interaction in the target language?
  How can the student develop his/her competence and acquire business-related information in the target language?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information about a company, product and services. He/she communicates in expected oral work life situations but requires help. The student interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone) and recognises the characteristics of Nordic operational environment. The student interprets the main points of publications of his/her field of study.

  Good

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly. He/she communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected oral work life situations. The student takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment and utilises the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures. He/she communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, oral work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers). The student can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment and utilise, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Kirja: Hanska-Aare Sari, Keränen Marit, Lehtoviita Kirsi, Pirttilä Mia: Gå med vinst! (Edita) ja opettajan lisämateriaali.
  
  Kirjaa on saatavilla myös digitaalisessa muodossa: https://www.editapublishing.fi/tuote/ga-med-vinst-affarssvenska-for-hogskolor (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lähiopetus, argumentointi, esitelmät, yhteistoiminnallinen oppiminen, harjoitukset, suullinen tentti. (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Jatkuva näyttö sekä suullinen tentti (ryhmäkeskustelu). Läsnäolo 75 %. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  Finnish

  Timing

  27.08.2020 - 19.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  19IBB

  19IB

  19IB1

  19IB2

  19IB6

  19IB7

  19IB8

  19IBA

  19IB3

  19IB4

  19IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Hanska

  Further information for students

  Esitiedot: lukion ruotsi tai vastaavat tiedot. (not translated)

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  - (not translated)

  Training and labour cooperation

  - (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  Suullinen tentti pienryhmissä to 1.10.2020 klo 8.15 alkaen tilassa B6-25.
  Suullisen uusinta sovitaan erikseen. (not translated)

  International connections

  - (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  Koko ruotsin kielen 5 opintopisteen opintojakso suoritetaan samanaikaisesti (Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, muntlig 2 op ja Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, skriftlig 3 op). Lähiopetus 60 h ja opiskelijan itsenäinen työskentely 60 h (sis. virtuaaliosuuden). (not translated)

  Content periodicity

  Opetusta 1. ja 2. periodilla. (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information of a company, product and services
  * communicates in expected oral work life situations, but requires help
  * interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone)
  * recognises the characteristics of the Nordic operational environment
  * interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

  Good

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly
  * communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected oral work life situations
  * takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment
  * utilizes the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student
  * is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures
  * communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, oral work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers)
  * can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment
  * can utilize, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

•   Professional Swedish for Business, Oral 3B00DW87-3003 11.01.2021-09.05.2021  2 cr  (19IBB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  On this course students will learn about the professional business communication in working life environment. European Framework of Reference for Languages B1 level.
  
  After completing the course students will be able to
  - tell about their personality, education, work experience, tasks and duties at work by using professional Swedish
  - meet customers’ needs when servicing the customer base and communicating with interest groups
  - follow and participate in the development of their field by using different ways of communication (media, conferences, literature).

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What can the student communicate on his/her competence and working life environment in the target language?
  What kind of qualifications does the student need to succeed in multicultural customer-based interaction in the target language?
  How can the student develop his/her competence and acquire business-related information in the target language?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information about a company, product and services. He/she communicates in expected oral work life situations but requires help. The student interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone) and recognises the characteristics of Nordic operational environment. The student interprets the main points of publications of his/her field of study.

  Good

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly. He/she communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected oral work life situations. The student takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment and utilises the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures. He/she communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, oral work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers). The student can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment and utilise, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sari Hanska

  Recommended or required reading

  Kirja: Hanska-Aare Sari, Keränen Marit, Lehtoviita Kirsi, Pirttilä Mia: Gå med vinst! (Edita) ja opettajan lisämateriaali.
  
  Kirjaa on saatavilla myös digitaalisessa muodossa: https://www.editapublishing.fi/tuote/ga-med-vinst-affarssvenska-for-hogskolor (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lähiopetus, argumentointi, esitelmät, yhteistoiminnallinen oppiminen, harjoitukset, suullinen tentti. (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Jatkuva näyttö sekä suullinen tentti (ryhmäkeskustelu). Läsnäolo 75 %. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  Finnish

  Timing

  11.01.2021 - 09.05.2021

  Registration

  27.11.2020 - 15.01.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  19IBB

  19IB

  19IB1

  19IB2

  19IB6

  19IB7

  19IB8

  19IBA

  19IB3

  19IB4

  19IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Hanska

  Further information for students

  Esitiedot: lukion ruotsi tai vastaavat tiedot. (not translated)

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  - (not translated)

  Training and labour cooperation

  - (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  Suullinen tentti pienryhmissä vko 8/21.
  Suullisen uusinta sovitaan erikseen. (not translated)

  International connections

  - (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  Koko ruotsin kielen 5 opintopisteen opintojakso suoritetaan samanaikaisesti (Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, muntlig 2 op ja Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, skriftlig 3 op). Lähiopetus 60 h ja opiskelijan itsenäinen työskentely 60 h (sis. virtuaaliosuuden). (not translated)

  Content periodicity

  Opetusta 3. ja 4. periodilla. (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information of a company, product and services
  * communicates in expected oral work life situations, but requires help
  * interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone)
  * recognises the characteristics of the Nordic operational environment
  * interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

  Good

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly
  * communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected oral work life situations
  * takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment
  * utilizes the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student
  * is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures
  * communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, oral work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers)
  * can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment
  * can utilize, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

•   Professional Swedish for Business, Written 3B00DW89-3001 27.08.2020-19.12.2020  3 cr  (19IBB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  On this course students will learn about the professional business communication in working life environment. European Framework of Reference for Languages B1 level.
  
  After completing the course students will be able to
  - tell about their personality, education, work experience, tasks and duties at work by using professional Swedish
  - meet customers’ needs when servicing the customer base and communicating with interest groups
  - follow and participate in the development of their field by using different ways of communication (media, conferences, literature).

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What can the student communicate on his/her competence and working life environment in the target language?
  What kind of qualifications does the student need to succeed in multicultural customer-based interaction in the target language?
  How can the student develop his/her competence and acquire business-related information in the target language?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information about a company, product and services. He/she communicates in expected written work life situations but requires help. The student interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. e-mail), recognises the characteristics of Nordic operational environment and interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

  Good

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly. He/she communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected written work life situations. He/she is able to interpret and create common business documents (e.g. memo) and take into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment. The student utilises the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures. He/she communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, written work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers).

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Kirja: Hanska-Aare Sari, Keränen Marit, Lehtoviita Kirsi, Pirttilä Mia: Gå med vinst! (Edita) ja opettajan lisämateriaali.
  Kirjaa on saatavilla myös digitaalisessa muodossa: https://www.editapublishing.fi/tuote/ga-med-vinst-affarssvenska-for-hogskolor (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lähiopetus, argumentointi, opetussimulaatiot ja -pelit, yhteistoiminnallinen oppiminen, harjoitukset, aktivoivat kirjoitustehtävät, referaatti/essee, itsenäinen verkko-opiskelu sekä kirjallinen tentti. (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Kirjallisesessa kielitaidossa on kaksi tenttiä (40 % + 40 % arvosanasta) sekä palautettavia kirjallisia harjoituksia (20 % arvosanasta).
  Opintojaksopalaute on pakollinen osasuoritus ja se annetaan opintojaksopalautejärjestelmän kautta.
  Läsnäolo 75 %. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  Finnish

  Timing

  27.08.2020 - 19.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 01.09.2020

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  19IBB

  19IB

  19IB1

  19IB2

  19IB6

  19IB7

  19IB8

  19IBA

  19IB3

  19IB4

  19IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Hanska

  Further information for students

  Esitiedot: lukion ruotsi tai vastaavat tiedot. (not translated)

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  1 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  - (not translated)

  Training and labour cooperation

  - (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  Kirjallinen tentti 1: to 8.10.2020
  Kirjallinen tentti 2: 10. - 21.12.2020 (Tenttiterraario)
  Palautettavat ja arvioitavat harjoitukset: palautus 17.12.2020 mennessä.
  Uusinnat liiketalouden yleisinä uusintatenttipäivinä 1. tentin osalta xx (ilmoittautuminen pakollinen Pakissa).
  2.kirjallisen tentin uusinnat 3. periodin aikana Tenttiterraariossa (ajat ilm. myöhemmin). (not translated)

  International connections

  - (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  Koko ruotsin kielen 5 opintopisteen opintojakso suoritetaan samanaikaisesti (Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, muntlig 2 op ja Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, skriftlig 3 op). Lähiopetus 60 h ja opiskelijan itsenäinen työskentely 60 h (sis. virtuaaliosuuden). (not translated)

  Content periodicity

  Opetusta 1. ja 2. periodilla. (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Opintojakso on hylätty, mikäli opiskelija ei saavuta arviointikriteerien taitotasoa 1. (not translated)

  Satisfactory

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information of a company, product and services
  * communicates in expected written work life situations, but requires help
  * interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone)
  * recognises the characteristics of the Nordic operational environment
  * interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

  Good

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly
  * communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected written work life situations
  * takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment
  * utilizes the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student
  * is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures
  * communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, written work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers)
  * can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment
  * can utilize, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

•   Professional Swedish for Business, Written 3B00DW89-3003 11.01.2021-16.05.2021  3 cr  (19IBB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  On this course students will learn about the professional business communication in working life environment. European Framework of Reference for Languages B1 level.
  
  After completing the course students will be able to
  - tell about their personality, education, work experience, tasks and duties at work by using professional Swedish
  - meet customers’ needs when servicing the customer base and communicating with interest groups
  - follow and participate in the development of their field by using different ways of communication (media, conferences, literature).

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What can the student communicate on his/her competence and working life environment in the target language?
  What kind of qualifications does the student need to succeed in multicultural customer-based interaction in the target language?
  How can the student develop his/her competence and acquire business-related information in the target language?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information about a company, product and services. He/she communicates in expected written work life situations but requires help. The student interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. e-mail), recognises the characteristics of Nordic operational environment and interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

  Good

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly. He/she communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected written work life situations. He/she is able to interpret and create common business documents (e.g. memo) and take into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment. The student utilises the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures. He/she communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, written work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers).

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sari Hanska

  Recommended or required reading

  Kirja: Hanska-Aare Sari, Keränen Marit, Lehtoviita Kirsi, Pirttilä Mia: Gå med vinst! (Edita) ja opettajan lisämateriaali.
  Kirjaa on saatavilla myös digitaalisessa muodossa: https://www.editapublishing.fi/tuote/ga-med-vinst-affarssvenska-for-hogskolor (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lähiopetus, argumentointi, opetussimulaatiot ja -pelit, yhteistoiminnallinen oppiminen, harjoitukset, aktivoivat kirjoitustehtävät, referaatti/essee, itsenäinen verkko-opiskelu sekä kirjallinen tentti. (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Kirjallisesessa kielitaidossa on kaksi tenttiä (40 % + 40 % arvosanasta) sekä palautettavia kirjallisia harjoituksia (20 % arvosanasta).
  Opintojaksopalaute on pakollinen osasuoritus ja se annetaan opintojaksopalautejärjestelmän kautta.
  Läsnäolo 75 %. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  Finnish

  Timing

  11.01.2021 - 16.05.2021

  Registration

  27.11.2020 - 15.01.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  19IBB

  19IB

  19IB1

  19IB2

  19IB6

  19IB7

  19IB8

  19IBA

  19IB3

  19IB4

  19IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Hanska

  Further information for students

  Esitiedot: lukion ruotsi tai vastaavat tiedot. (not translated)

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  1 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  - (not translated)

  Training and labour cooperation

  - (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  Kirjallinen tentti 1:
  Kirjallinen tentti 2: Vkot 16 - 17 Tenttiterraario
  Palautettavat ja arvioitavat harjoitukset: palautus 4.5.21 mennessä.
  Uusinnat ilmoitetaan myöhemmin. (not translated)

  International connections

  - (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  Koko ruotsin kielen 5 opintopisteen opintojakso suoritetaan samanaikaisesti (Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, muntlig 2 op ja Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, skriftlig 3 op). Lähiopetus 60 h ja opiskelijan itsenäinen työskentely 60 h (sis. virtuaaliosuuden). (not translated)

  Content periodicity

  Opetusta 3. ja 4. periodilla. (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information of a company, product and services
  * communicates in expected written work life situations, but requires help
  * interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone)
  * recognises the characteristics of the Nordic operational environment
  * interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

  Good

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly
  * communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected written work life situations
  * takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment
  * utilizes the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student
  * is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures
  * communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, written work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers)
  * can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment
  * can utilize, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

•   Project Management 3B00DV97-3003 19.10.2020-10.12.2020  2 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course introduces the main tools and techniques of project management.
  During this course a virtual project will be defined, initiated and planned by the students.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand the purpose of project management
  • Act as member of a project team
  • Write a project plan

  Course contents

  • How to set and initiate a project?
  • How to form a team and define the roles and responsibilities?
  • How to write a professional level project plan?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name and explain project management and its key elements. He/she recognizes the phases of a project and is able to name reasons for having a project mode. The student knows the role of a project plan document and its elements. The student can act as a member of a small-scale project team. The student is able to give and receive feedback related to a set project, collaborate in a small team and take responsibility of his/her own studies.

  Good

  The student is able to apply the basic tools used in projects and structure a small project team with dedicated tasks. The student can explain the needs for setting up a small scale project with a project plan. The student can act as a project manager or a team member to accomplish the project. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback and develop skills for co-operation with dedicated roles. The student takes responsibility of his/her studies and is able to balance the workload of the team.

  Excellent

  The student understands the meaning and relations of the basic concepts of project management. The student analyses multiple alternatives and is able to make sustainable project decisions. He/she is able to connect the project management elements together in a professional manner. The student applies project management tools in a systematic manner and searches and justifies multiple options. The student is able to assess the team and team tasks. He/she finds creative solutions and motivates and develops a project team. The student is able to use feedback to grow professionally in the field and develop creative and constructive working methods. He/she works responsibly towards the project team and commits himself/herself to group work and project management methods beyond the required level.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  19.10.2020 - 10.12.2020

  Registration

  19.09.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Project Management 3B00DV97-3004 19.10.2020-10.12.2020  2 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course introduces the main tools and techniques of project management.
  During this course a virtual project will be defined, initiated and planned by the students.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand the purpose of project management
  • Act as member of a project team
  • Write a project plan

  Course contents

  • How to set and initiate a project?
  • How to form a team and define the roles and responsibilities?
  • How to write a professional level project plan?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name and explain project management and its key elements. He/she recognizes the phases of a project and is able to name reasons for having a project mode. The student knows the role of a project plan document and its elements. The student can act as a member of a small-scale project team. The student is able to give and receive feedback related to a set project, collaborate in a small team and take responsibility of his/her own studies.

  Good

  The student is able to apply the basic tools used in projects and structure a small project team with dedicated tasks. The student can explain the needs for setting up a small scale project with a project plan. The student can act as a project manager or a team member to accomplish the project. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback and develop skills for co-operation with dedicated roles. The student takes responsibility of his/her studies and is able to balance the workload of the team.

  Excellent

  The student understands the meaning and relations of the basic concepts of project management. The student analyses multiple alternatives and is able to make sustainable project decisions. He/she is able to connect the project management elements together in a professional manner. The student applies project management tools in a systematic manner and searches and justifies multiple options. The student is able to assess the team and team tasks. He/she finds creative solutions and motivates and develops a project team. The student is able to use feedback to grow professionally in the field and develop creative and constructive working methods. He/she works responsibly towards the project team and commits himself/herself to group work and project management methods beyond the required level.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  19.10.2020 - 10.12.2020

  Registration

  19.09.2020 - 18.10.2020

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Project Studies 3B00DW93-3001 01.01.2021-22.12.2021  5 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  International Business students can carry out a part of their studies as project studies. The projects are defined in advance for the credit count, costs and duration. The projects are commissioned e.g. by local companies or by Tampere University of Applied Sciences. The team projects come from actual companies and the students themselves. See further instructions and required forms at www.wiki.tamk.fi (use "Business Related Project Studies" as a search key there).
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Work more professionally in real projects, and participate in carrying out systematically managed projects, from project approval and planning to control and implementation.
  Apply and further develop existing disciplinary knowledge in real life cases and projects.
  Use their individual communication, negotiation and group work skills more effectively and efficiently.
  Enhance their use of different sources of information, learning environments, project management software tools, and IT in general.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  How can universities and local companies work together?
  What different projects are relevant for university of applied sciences (UAS) students?
  What kind of co-operation will benefit both the student(s) and the client?
  What can a UAS student learn and benefit from participation in a real project?
  How is project management interrelated to the strategic and general management of an organization?
  What are the benefits of applying systematic project management methods and related IT tools for different projects?
  How are projects planned, implemented, controlled and reported successfully?
  What kind of proposed generalizations can be made based on successful project outcomes?

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  The Project Studies is an administrative solution to get the students’ various individual business-related project studies and credits registered, as a part of their bachelor’s degree studies. The student can take initiative of the project he/she wants to include to the project studies.
  
  The student is able to plan and implement his/her own project. He/she can reach the pre-set objectives and report the results in writing. He/she is able and willing to receive feedback from the commissioner and supervisor, and analyze the project outcome in conjunction with them.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2021 - 22.12.2021

  Registration

  10.11.2020 - 15.11.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  5 cr

  Virtual proportion

  5 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Quantitative methods 3B00FH23-3003 22.03.2021-01.06.2021  3 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  After the course, the student will know
  • the role of statistics in scientific methods
  • the relevant statistical terminology
  • the theory and basic steps of statistical analysis
  After the course, the student will be able to
  • apply the analytical techniques covered in the course
  • present results from statistical analyses

  Course contents

  What does quantitative research mean?
  What does the term statistical significance mean?
  What is probability theory?
  How to choose an appropriate research method?
  How to build a questionnaire?
  How to collect and analyze data?
  How to interpret the results?
  
  The most important quantitative methods will be discussed and practiced in SPSS.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can determine and use the concepts and methods of quantitative research. The student takes responsibility for any of his duties in research activities and makes some contribution to a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of explaining the concepts and methods of quantitative research and applying them in cases of reasonable difficulty. The student works actively, cooperates responsibly and constructively, both individually and in a group. The student can solve the given exercises and problems, as well as interpret the answers for the benefit of business projects and activities.

  Excellent

  The student knows the different approaches very well, can work with quantitative research methods individually. The student can produce correct solutions to research problems, as well as interpret the answers profoundly for the benefit of business projects and activities. The student makes a noticeable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively, and flexibly.

  ---

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online. The e-learning material is available in Moodle. The contact days and personal consultations are flexible so that the course fits in everybody's timetable.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  22.03.2021 - 01.06.2021

  Registration

  17.01.2021 - 21.03.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  18IB

  16IB

  17IB

  Seats

  15 - 30

  Teacher(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  3 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can determine and use the concepts and methods of quantitative research. The student takes responsibility for any of his duties in research activities and makes some contribution to a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of explaining the concepts and methods of quantitative research and applying them in cases of reasonable difficulty. The student works actively, cooperates responsibly and constructively, both individually and in a group. The student can solve the given exercises and problems, as well as interpret the answers for the benefit of business projects and activities.

  Excellent

  The student knows the different approaches very well, can work with quantitative research methods individually. The student can produce correct solutions to research problems, as well as interpret the answers profoundly for the benefit of business projects and activities. The student makes a noticeable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively, and flexibly.

•   Required International Study Exchange 3B00CX22-3003 01.08.2020-31.12.2020  25 cr  (18IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the required international study exchange of four to six months, the International Business students build their knowledge and professional skill set so that the exchange studies will support their choice of the second year modules or their other well-grounded professional goals.
  
  The one-semester exchange is a mandatory part of International Business studies for the Finnish degree students during the third year of studies. The foreign degree students of the programme can apply for the exchange, but do not have to do so as their stay in Finland already is counted as an exchange. Instead, the foreign degree students finish two modules of IB second year studies to meet the degree requirement of 210 credits.
  
  The students plan the study contents of the exchange period (= Learning Agreement) with the International Coordinator of the School of Business and Services. TAMK International Services help the students in the exchange practicalities and TAMK grants.
  
  After completing the exchange period abroad, the students will be able to:
  
  Utilize their language and intercultural skills.
  Develop their ability to operate in a foreign environment and culture
  Maintain and create new networks.
  Strengthen their self-confidence and improve their tolerance.
  Improve their readiness for job seeking and employment opportunities.
  Adopt new ways of learning and thinking.
  Utilize new topics, which are not taught at home university.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  How to plan the exchange studies to further improve your strengths and to reach your personal goals?
  Which choices could improve your employment opportunities and professional development?
  What makes your BBA degree different form the others?

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2020 - 31.12.2020

  Registration

  02.07.2020 - 08.09.2020

  Credits

  25 cr

  Group(s)

  18IB

  Teacher(s)

  Riitta Vihuri

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Research Plan 3B00CX34-3003 01.01.2021-31.12.2021  3 cr  (18IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  A thorough Thesis Plan, i.e. an extended topic analysis, forms the second chapter of the thesis. As a rule you should have made good progress in familiarization with literature at this stage and, hence, proper referencing is expected from a Thesis Plan.
  
  At this point of the thesis process, the students will be able to:
  
  
  Develop thesis objectives or form possible research questions.
  Understand which theories form the basis of the thesis.
  Know how to choose appropriate research methods.
  Demonstrate an estimated project timetable for the thesis project.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What is your thesis topic?
  What are the objectives and the purpose of your thesis?
  Which theories form the basis of the thesis?
  What research methodology is used?
  What is the structure and the schedule of your thesis?

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 13.12.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  18IB

  Teacher(s)

  Tuula Andersson, Elena Grigorova, Petteri Vilén, Sari Matala, Pasi Kuusijärvi, Sven Rassl, Tuomo Soini, Annikka Lepola, Shaidul Kazi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Sales and Negotiation Skills 3B00DV99-3009 18.01.2021-26.02.2021  4 cr  (20IB1, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will get to know different sales processes and negotiation situations. Students will plan and practice different sales approaches and improve their personal sales skills. During the course the students will plan and organize a sales event.
  
  After completing the course the students will be able to
  • Describe an effective sales process
  • Prepare for different sales and negotiation situations
  • Listen to the customer and identify the customer needs during a sales meeting
  • Communicate key messages to the customer
  • Plan and organize a sales event

  Course contents

  • What is a sales process and how to apply it in practice?
  • Which factors affect successful sales negotiation?
  • What are the differences between b-to-c and b-to-b sales?
  • How to listen to the customer and ask good questions?
  • How to show empathy and address difficult situations in a customer oriented way?
  • How to plan and organize a sales event?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can describe the sales and negotiations process and identify sales opportunities. The student can ask a customer appropriate questions relevant to closing a sale and list the eight types of sales people identified by the Harvard Business School research. The student is able to name the ABC and SEA sales acronyms and participate in a sales event. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present factual information about their product or service. The student can follow a script or checklist to produce communication to explain the benefits of their service. The student is able to communicate in a sales environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

  Good

  The student can explain the sales process and explain the role of participants in the sales process. The student is able to comment on and evaluate a sales meeting and describe the 8 sales personalities. The student can explain and apply sales processes to their own business simulation and develop sales and negotiation strategies. The student can describe and plan a sales meeting, analyse the ABC sales process and explain why SEA sales process is more relevant to contemporary sales. The student can explain the importance of listening to customer needs. The student is able to explain sales phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English. The student is able to take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures and can adjust their sales communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates some ability to evaluate and adapt their sales approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new sales methods, technologies and ideas.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse and evaluate a sales situation. The student can analyse the communications structures within an organization and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organisation. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization. The student can reflect on their own strengths and weaknesses as a sales person and negotiator and adapt their negotiations strategy as needs arise. The student can identify their sales type (Harvard BR – 8 types of sales people) and take appropriate steps to develop areas as required. The student analyses sales challenges and synthesises possible solutions and recognises possible implications. The student collaborates with peers during the learning process and evaluates different sales approaches. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their sales approach as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values and is able to adapt their sales and negotiations techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped class sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Roleplay exercise

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Participation in the course, assignments, and Sales Up performance will be evaluated

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  18.01.2021 - 26.02.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 05.01.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB1

  20IB3

  20IB2

  20IB4

  Teacher(s)

  Niina Syrjälä, Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Practice in setting up and working in a virtual trade fair. Negotiations with other virtual firms

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  N/A

  Students use of time and load

  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Prepare and participate in the Sales Up event

  Content periodicity

  Themes will be announced in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can describe the sales and negotiations process and identify sales opportunities. The student can ask a customer appropriate questions relevant to closing a sale and list the eight types of sales people identified by the Harvard Business School research. The student is able to name the ABC and SEA sales acronyms and participate in a sales event. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present factual information about their product or service. The student can follow a script or checklist to produce communication to explain the benefits of their service. The student is able to communicate in a sales environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

  Good

  The student can explain the sales process and explain the role of participants in the sales process. The student is able to comment on and evaluate a sales meeting and describe the 8 sales personalities. The student can explain and apply sales processes to their own business simulation and develop sales and negotiation strategies. The student can describe and plan a sales meeting, analyse the ABC sales process and explain why SEA sales process is more relevant to contemporary sales. The student can explain the importance of listening to customer needs. The student is able to explain sales phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English. The student is able to take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures and can adjust their sales communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates some ability to evaluate and adapt their sales approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new sales methods, technologies and ideas.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse and evaluate a sales situation. The student can analyse the communications structures within an organization and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organisation. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization. The student can reflect on their own strengths and weaknesses as a sales person and negotiator and adapt their negotiations strategy as needs arise. The student can identify their sales type (Harvard BR – 8 types of sales people) and take appropriate steps to develop areas as required. The student analyses sales challenges and synthesises possible solutions and recognises possible implications. The student collaborates with peers during the learning process and evaluates different sales approaches. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their sales approach as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values and is able to adapt their sales and negotiations techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

•   Sales and Negotiation Skills 3B00DV99-3010 18.01.2021-26.02.2021  4 cr  (20IB6, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will get to know different sales processes and negotiation situations. Students will plan and practice different sales approaches and improve their personal sales skills. During the course the students will plan and organize a sales event.
  
  After completing the course the students will be able to
  • Describe an effective sales process
  • Prepare for different sales and negotiation situations
  • Listen to the customer and identify the customer needs during a sales meeting
  • Communicate key messages to the customer
  • Plan and organize a sales event

  Course contents

  • What is a sales process and how to apply it in practice?
  • Which factors affect successful sales negotiation?
  • What are the differences between b-to-c and b-to-b sales?
  • How to listen to the customer and ask good questions?
  • How to show empathy and address difficult situations in a customer oriented way?
  • How to plan and organize a sales event?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can describe the sales and negotiations process and identify sales opportunities. The student can ask a customer appropriate questions relevant to closing a sale and list the eight types of sales people identified by the Harvard Business School research. The student is able to name the ABC and SEA sales acronyms and participate in a sales event. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present factual information about their product or service. The student can follow a script or checklist to produce communication to explain the benefits of their service. The student is able to communicate in a sales environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

  Good

  The student can explain the sales process and explain the role of participants in the sales process. The student is able to comment on and evaluate a sales meeting and describe the 8 sales personalities. The student can explain and apply sales processes to their own business simulation and develop sales and negotiation strategies. The student can describe and plan a sales meeting, analyse the ABC sales process and explain why SEA sales process is more relevant to contemporary sales. The student can explain the importance of listening to customer needs. The student is able to explain sales phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English. The student is able to take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures and can adjust their sales communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates some ability to evaluate and adapt their sales approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new sales methods, technologies and ideas.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse and evaluate a sales situation. The student can analyse the communications structures within an organization and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organisation. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization. The student can reflect on their own strengths and weaknesses as a sales person and negotiator and adapt their negotiations strategy as needs arise. The student can identify their sales type (Harvard BR – 8 types of sales people) and take appropriate steps to develop areas as required. The student analyses sales challenges and synthesises possible solutions and recognises possible implications. The student collaborates with peers during the learning process and evaluates different sales approaches. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their sales approach as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values and is able to adapt their sales and negotiations techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped class sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Roleplay exercise

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Participation in the course, assignments, and Sales Up performance will be evaluated

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  18.01.2021 - 26.02.2021

  Registration

  25.11.2020 - 05.01.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB6

  20IB8

  20IB7

  20IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Niina Syrjälä, Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Practice in setting up and working in a virtual trade fair. Negotiations with other virtual firms

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  N/A

  Students use of time and load

  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Prepare and participate in the Sales Up event

  Content periodicity

  Themes will be announced in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can describe the sales and negotiations process and identify sales opportunities. The student can ask a customer appropriate questions relevant to closing a sale and list the eight types of sales people identified by the Harvard Business School research. The student is able to name the ABC and SEA sales acronyms and participate in a sales event. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present factual information about their product or service. The student can follow a script or checklist to produce communication to explain the benefits of their service. The student is able to communicate in a sales environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

  Good

  The student can explain the sales process and explain the role of participants in the sales process. The student is able to comment on and evaluate a sales meeting and describe the 8 sales personalities. The student can explain and apply sales processes to their own business simulation and develop sales and negotiation strategies. The student can describe and plan a sales meeting, analyse the ABC sales process and explain why SEA sales process is more relevant to contemporary sales. The student can explain the importance of listening to customer needs. The student is able to explain sales phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English. The student is able to take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures and can adjust their sales communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates some ability to evaluate and adapt their sales approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new sales methods, technologies and ideas.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse and evaluate a sales situation. The student can analyse the communications structures within an organization and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organisation. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization. The student can reflect on their own strengths and weaknesses as a sales person and negotiator and adapt their negotiations strategy as needs arise. The student can identify their sales type (Harvard BR – 8 types of sales people) and take appropriate steps to develop areas as required. The student analyses sales challenges and synthesises possible solutions and recognises possible implications. The student collaborates with peers during the learning process and evaluates different sales approaches. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their sales approach as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values and is able to adapt their sales and negotiations techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

•   Service Design Thinking and Customer Centric Business Development 3B00FB62-3002 24.08.2020-11.12.2020  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  In this course students will learn service design thinking in a digital business environment. The student will study how service design thinking is applied to customer centric business development and how the customer centric value chains are formed. Students will use service design tools and methods to design a business development plan for an e-commerce company.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  - develop innovative business development plan by using different kind of tools, like Storytelling, Design Scenarios, Service Blueprints, Empathy Map etc.
  - search different kind of relevant customer information using design thinking tools
  - describe the value chain in e-commerce

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  • Service Design as an inter-disciplinary approach
  • Fields of Service Design
  • Service Design Thinking tools